JP7414103B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Generally, a pachinko game machine called DigiPachi is equipped with a first opening for performing a jackpot lottery when a game ball wins. In addition, some gaming machines are equipped with a second starting port that allows the game balls to win by operating an electric accessory, in order to allow players to win many jackpot lots with a small number of game balls. Further, some gaming machines include a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the attention to the game and the interest in the game to increase the player's desire to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase attention to the game and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Launch control means (41) capable of launching game balls at predetermined intervals (Th);
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
Equipped with
The distribution unit (94) changes the rotation direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotation direction from the first direction to the second direction is used as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) until reaching the first switching point (P1) again via the second switching point (P2) is a positive integer multiple of the predetermined interval (Th) or approximately positive. It is characterized by being an integral multiple (for example, in the range of ±15% of a positive integral multiple of the rotation period).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase attention to the game and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play a jackpot game.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 5(A) is a sectional view showing an example of the distribution device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5(B) is a sectional view showing an example of the distribution member of the distribution device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the action of the distribution member. FIG. 3 is a sectional view for explaining the action of the sorting device. FIG. 3 is a sectional view for explaining the action of the sorting device. 5(A) and 5(B) are sectional views for explaining the action of the sorting device, and FIG. 5(C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start prize winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a through gate processing procedure executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 14. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal electric accessory control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 3rd embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on the 4th embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 35 is a diagram showing main parts of the special variable prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. 43 is a sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a sectional view showing the main parts of the wing accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the wing accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. A sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 53(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53(B) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 54(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54(B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine distribution device according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. 56(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A). FIG. 57(A) is a sectional view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 in FIG. 58(A). FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member. FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of an electric supporting member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 in FIG. 63(A). FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 30th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 65(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in a standby state in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 65(A). 66(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line in FIG. 66(A). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric tulip accessory device of a game machine according to a 31st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board including the sorting device and the electric support member of the game machine based on this form. FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including an allocating device of a gaming machine according to the 34th embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby state, and FIG. A) is a perspective view of the main part. FIG. 70(A) is a view showing the main parts when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. 70(B) is a perspective view showing the main parts in FIG. 70(A). FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including the sorting device and electric support member of a gaming machine according to the 35th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of FIG. 71(A). FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including a distribution device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including the sorting device and the electric support member in the standby position of a gaming machine according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. A) is a perspective view of the main part. FIG. 74(A) is a diagram showing the electric support member in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member in the 37th embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing main parts of a game board including an allocating device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76(A) is a sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), and FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 75(B). FIG. 77(A) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the operating position. Diagram showing. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a thirty-ninth embodiment of the present invention. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including the sorting device and second starting port of the game machine shown in FIG. 79; FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80; 81 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the action of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80; FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the action of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80; FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing an example of an electric support member that opens and closes the second starting port shown in FIG. 80; 86(A) is a sectional view taken along the line A6-A6 in FIG. 80, and FIG. 86(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A7-A7 in FIG. 80. FIG. 87(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is at the operating position in FIG. 86(A), and FIG. 87(B) is a diagram when the electric support member is at the operating position in FIG. 86(A). The figure which shows an example of the lighting timing of a synchronous lamp, and a lighting timing. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine based on this embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of synchronous lamp control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 90; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 17. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 40th embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 41st embodiment of this invention. FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the forty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 96(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the forty-third embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 44th embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 45th embodiment of this invention. FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device in the 46th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 99(B) is an example of a main part of a sorting device in the 47th embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a forty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 101(A) is a perspective view showing an example of a sorting member of a sorting device according to the forty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 101(B) is a main part of the sorting device according to the forty-ninth embodiment of the present invention. A sectional view showing an example. FIG. 102(A) is a sectional view showing an example of the essential parts of the sorting device according to the 50th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 102(B) is a sectional view of the essential parts of the sorting device according to the 51st embodiment of the present invention. A sectional view showing an example. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a 52nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104(A) is a sectional view showing an example of essential parts of a sorting device according to the 53rd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing the torsion coil spring of FIG. 104(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the modification of the sorting device in the 53rd embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 54th embodiment of this invention. FIG. 107(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device according to the 55th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 107(B) is an example of the main part of the sorting device according to the 56th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 107(C) is a diagram showing an example of the essential parts of the sorting device according to the 57th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device in the 58th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 108(B) is an example of a main part of a sorting device in the 59th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a sixtieth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the 61st embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 109(B) is an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a 62nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109(C) is a diagram showing an example of the essential parts of the sorting device according to the sixty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows an example of a principal part. FIG. 110(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the sixty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 110(B) is an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the sixty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a sixty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B) are diagrams showing an example of essential parts of a sorting device according to the sixty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of a device. FIG. 112(A) is a diagram showing an example of essential parts of a sorting device according to the 70th embodiment of the present invention, and FIGS. 112(B) and 112(C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112(A). figure. 113(A) is a sectional view taken along the A8-A8 section line in FIG. 112(A), and FIG. 113(B) is a sectional view taken along the A9-A9 section line in FIG. 112(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 71st embodiment of this invention. FIG. 115(A) is a diagram showing an example of essential parts of a sorting device according to the seventy-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 115(B) is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115(A). FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting device in the 73rd embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the lighting timing and the lighting-off timing of a synchronous lamp. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of synchronous lamp control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 119. The figure which shows an example of the sorting device in the 74th embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the lighting timing and the lighting timing of a synchronous lamp. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 127(A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to the 75th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 127(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 128(A) is a sectional view taken along the A10-A10 cutting line in FIG. 127(A), and FIG. 128(B) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 128(A). FIG. 129(A) is a diagram showing an example of main parts of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to the 76th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the main parts of a game board including an electric support member in the embodiment of No. 77. The figure which shows an example of the game board containing the sorting device, the electric support member, and the 2nd starting port in the 78th embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the game board including the electric support member and the 2nd starting port in the 79th embodiment of this invention. FIG. 132(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a game board including an electric support member and a second starting port according to the 80th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 132(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 132(C) is a diagram when the electric support member is in a standby position in FIG. 131(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the game board containing the sorting device, the electric support member, and the 2nd starting port in the 81st embodiment of this invention. FIG. 134(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a sorting device in the 82nd embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 134(B) is a sectional view showing an example of the sorting device in the 83rd embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 134(C) is a sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 84th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 134(D) is a sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 85th embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, first to eighty-fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example of embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance etc. that is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined specific period in a special figure game performance.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be a piezoelectric element, for example, as long as it can be used to detect whether or not there is an operation by a player.

Furthermore, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Furthermore, in place of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 in the special figure game performance will be reflected in the operation button performance, etc.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player is operating the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is configured to fire a game ball toward the gaming area at regular intervals of, for example, one every 0.6 seconds. Drive controlled. In addition, the game ball may be one whose firing interval is set according to the game state among a plurality of predetermined firing intervals. For example, the firing intervals of game balls may be different between the special figure game state and the jackpot game state. Specifically, in the special figure game state, the game balls are launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and in the jackpot game state, the game balls are launched at longer intervals than in the special figure game state, for example, even if set to 1 second intervals. good.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin so that the player can visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and output audio during game performances and the like. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect by lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the content of control is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. a variable winning device 316, an out port 317, a first through gate 318, a second through gate 319, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 37, a sorting device 35, and an electric support member 36 (movable), which is a normal electric accessory. Accessory members) are provided. The first left starting opening 314L and the first right starting opening 314R correspond to winning openings with the same function, and hereinafter, they will be collectively referred to as the "first starting opening 314." The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 314, 315." Further, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318, 319." In addition, the general winning hole 313, the first starting hole 314, the second starting hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316b correspond to winning holes having different functions.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. And, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the various winning holes (general winning hole 313, first starting hole 314, second starting hole 315, or variable winning hole 316b) It is discharged from the out port 317.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening 317 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. ing. The general winning hole 313, the left first starting hole 314L, the right first starting hole 314R, the second starting hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316b each have an entrance sensor 313a, which can individually detect the passage of a game ball, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 10). The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes.

The through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which game balls can pass. The through gates 318, 319 have ball entrance sensors 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 318, 319. The ball entry sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is held to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory that supports winning to the second starting port 315. . However, the normal symbol winning lottery is not executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is clearly indicated by a normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a pair of LED lamps on a normal symbol display 373, which will be described later. Hereinafter, the "normal symbol" may be abbreviated as "common symbol", and for example, "common symbol random number storage area" is an abbreviation of "normal symbol retention area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 arranged at the center of the lower part of the game board 31, and the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 is detected by the ball entering sensor 318a. do. On the game board 31, when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes through the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the left, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. Note that the first through gate 318 may be provided on the upstream side of the electric support member 36 in the path leading to the right first starting port 314R in the distribution device 35, for example, in the vicinity of the introduction port 350 above the distribution member 38. May be placed. It is also possible to arrange the first through gate 318 outside the sorting device 35 and near the life nail (belly button nail) 31H, so that the life nail (belly button nail) 31H is omitted and the life nail (belly button nail) is omitted. ) It is also possible to arrange it in the part where 31H was provided. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the ball entry sensor 318a can detect passage of a game ball in a specific area (in the present embodiment, the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35), and there is no need to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is also conceivable to attach a mark to the distribution device 35 at the position of the ball entry sensor 318a to indicate that the area is a specific area.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 and above the right part of the variable prize winning device 316. On the game board 31, when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes through the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the right, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the second through gate 319.

Ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319a is input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is also possible to individually detect the entry of game balls using other detection methods. It may be any sensor.

The variable winning device 316 includes, in addition to the variable winning hole 316b, an opening/closing door 316c that switches whether or not to limit the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316b. The opening/closing door 316c is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the variable winning device 316, when the opening/closing door 316c opens, the game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316b, and when the opening/closing door 316c closes, the entry of the gaming ball into the variable winning opening 316b is restricted. be done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening/closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the lottery result in a jackpot game is a jackpot and the player shifts to the jackpot game state, the player enters the variable prize opening 316b by hitting right in the round game in which the opening/closing door 316c opens. You can win the ball. This allows the player to obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special figure game.

In the game machine 10, when entry of a game ball into the left first starting port 314L, right first starting port 314R, or second starting port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314La, 314Ra or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery is performed by the control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery result from the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b, the entering ball sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the general winning hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is three, and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the variable winning hole 316b. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game enters a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable prize opening 316b is opened for round gaming (unit gaming). ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 5, 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed as described above. If the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 2R normal jackpot gaming state, a 2R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 5R normal jackpot gaming state, a 5R probability varying jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability varying jackpot gaming state. The 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R definite variable jackpot game state are two round games in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning hole 316b. This is a game state including an opening/closing execution mode. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variable jackpot game state are game states in which a round game is played 5 times in the open/close execution mode, and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state in which a round game is played 16 times in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, it is possible to acquire the same amount of game balls in round games in any game state, and in terms of the game balls that can be acquired, the more round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the more the player can earn the game balls. This is an advantageous gaming situation. Therefore, in this embodiment, in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous for the player, followed by the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 2R normal jackpot gaming state and the 2R certain variable jackpot gaming state are the most disadvantageous for the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays a symbol variation display and a special symbol according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315. Various displays such as game presentation displays are performed. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-display sections in addition to the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section is arranged, for example, at the top, bottom, left, or right of the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section may be movable between a position where the symbol display section 341 is covered and a position where the symbol display section 341 is not covered. Further, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper tray 23.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered, for example, from "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. Note that sub-symbols such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special pattern game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. Ru. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, all the main symbols first vary along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbols on all lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the symbol fluctuation display ends.

The main display section 37 is arranged at the upper right corner of the game board 31 and includes a first special symbol display 371, a second special symbol display 372, a normal symbol display 373, and a pending number display 374. Note that the main display section 37 may be placed at the lower left or lower right of the game board 31.

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning in the first start opening 314. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, in response to winning in the first starting opening 314, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the first special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display 371 in a variable manner and then stopped. It's called a pattern game.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning in the second starting opening 315. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, displaying the second special symbol by changing it and then stopping it in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in response to winning in the second starting hole 315 is called a second special symbol game.

Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as simply a special symbol. Also, the "special design" may be abbreviated as "tokuzu". For example, "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations for "first special symbol" and "second special symbol," respectively, and "first special symbol game" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations for "first special symbol" and "second special symbol," respectively. ” are abbreviations for “first special symbol game” and “second special symbol game”, respectively. Furthermore, the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 are not limited to 7-segment displays, but are LED groups in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a straight line, circle, arc, matrix, etc. It may be.

The normal symbol display 373 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 (whether or not to put it in a support state) in response to winnings in the through gates 318 and 319. The lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is clearly indicated. The normal symbol display 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and clearly indicates the lottery result by a normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. It should be noted that the normal symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the LED lamp pair.

In the pending number display 374, the pending number N of the variable display of special symbols generated by winning in the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is displayed by a plurality of LED lamps (eight in this embodiment) arranged in a row. Displayed by the number of lights. Such display processing for the number of reservations N is executed based on the number of reservations N stored in the special symbol reservation number storage area NA in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sorting device 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5(A), the distribution device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a distribution member 38, a first passage 351, and a second passage 352. In this sorting device 35, the game balls 99 that have entered through the introduction port 350 are directed to the left (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and to the right (in FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the distribution member 38. 5(A) in the clockwise direction), the liquid is alternately distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows game balls to enter the distribution device 35. This introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (belly button nail) 31H of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. The game ball is guided to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, there is provided a guiding part 31E that guides the game ball that has fallen onto the stage 31S through the warp port 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31 to the life nail 31H. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen onto the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the windmill 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the game balls sent out to the game board 31 are operated on the left side of the game board 31 by operating the firing handle 22 so that the game balls pass on the left side of the game board 31. Game balls can be introduced into the sorting device 35 via 350. In addition, in the game machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated so that the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, so-called right-handed hitting, the game ball is placed in the variable prize opening 316b. The life nail 31H is provided with a nail to prevent the game balls from gathering, and in the case of right-handed hitting, the game balls cannot be expected to be introduced from the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35. Therefore, it is easier to receive a jackpot lottery by using the sorting device 35 than by playing right-handed, and the playing state where left-handed is more advantageous for the player compared to right-handed (in this embodiment, mode A to mode C described later) (See FIG. 13(B))), players are encouraged to play the game by hitting left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes the game balls introduced from the introduction port 350 into the first passage 351 or the second passage 352. The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls sorted into the first passage 351 are released in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game balls sorted into the second passage 352 are released in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B), the distribution member 38 includes a rotating shaft 381, a partition piece 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. In the distribution member 38, the partition piece 382, the ball receiving guide piece 383, and the eccentric part 384 rotate integrally about the rotating shaft 381. The partition piece 382 extends from the center of the ball receiving guide piece 383 perpendicularly to the ball receiving guiding piece 383 . The ball guide piece 383 has a left ball guide piece 385 on the left side of the partition piece 382 and a right ball guide piece 386 on the right side of the partition piece 382.

The eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 and includes a moving member 387 and a housing portion 388 that accommodates the moving member 387. The moving member 387 is, for example, a sphere, a cylinder, or the like, and moves the housing section 388 from side to side depending on the attitude of the distribution member 38 . When the distribution member 38 is in a right-inclined posture in which the partition piece 382 is inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction (the state shown by the solid line in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B)), the moving member 387 is moved to the accommodating portion 388. The center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentrically shifted to the right side of the center by the moving member 387. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the rightward tilted posture. On the other hand, when the distributing member 38 is in a left-tilt position in which the partition piece 382 is tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (the state indicated by the imaginary line in FIGS. 5(A) and 5(B)), the moving member 387 is It is located on the left side of the storage section 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, the game balls 99 entered into the distribution device 35 are distributed between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 and between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. It can be accepted somewhere in between. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), when the distribution member 38 is in the rightward tilted position, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guiding piece 385. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6(C) and 6(D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, the load of the game ball The robot rotates to the left (counterclockwise) and changes to a left-leaning posture. Thereby, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guiding piece 385.

As shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the game ball 99 guided to the left along the left ball guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351 and You can easily win at the left first starting port 314L located directly below. In addition, although the first passage 351 is linear in FIG. It may be. In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is located at a position where the game ball passing through the first passage 351 can easily win a prize, depending on the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. will be placed in

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(A), when the distribution member 38 is in the left tilted position, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guiding piece 386. Further, as shown in FIG. 8(B), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, it rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball and changes to a rightward tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386 is guided to the right side along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 and falls along the second path 352. At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318. That the game ball 99 has passed through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entry sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to activate the electric support member 36 (normal electric accessory), and if the lottery result of this normal symbol winning lottery is a win, the electric supporting member 36 is activated. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, and the operating time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, depends on the gaming state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13(B) to 13(D)).

As shown in FIGS. 8(B) and 8(C), the game ball 99 guided to the right side along the right ball guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the game ball 99 falls along the second passage 352. It moves toward the right first starting port 314R located directly below.

Here, the second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. This second starting port 315 is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R, and is used to prevent game balls 99 that have fallen into the ball receiving portion 391. enters the second starting port 315. Moreover, a plate-shaped electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is arranged between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R. This electric support member 36 restricts the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. an operating position (second position) that supports winning of game balls, and a standby position (second position) that restricts winning of game balls to the second starting port 315 and allows winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R. (first position), the game board 31 is moved back and forth through an opening 360 provided in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 8(C), when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, since the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is Since it is not restricted by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second path 352 can easily enter the right first starting port 314R. Note that the design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same way as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R can also be changed as appropriate depending on the shape of the second passage 352, etc.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is blocked by the opening/closing part 362 of the electric support member 36, thereby restricting the winning of the game ball to the right first starting opening 314R. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 that has fallen along the second path 352 is guided above the ball receiver 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then 391. The game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiver 391 enters the second starting port 315. In addition, game balls that flow down from above the stage 310 and the electric support member 36 provided below the variable winning device 316 and are received by the electric support member 36 can also win a prize in the second starting port 315. That is, in this embodiment, both the game balls 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game balls 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are transferred to the second path by one electric support member 36. The ball can be entered into the starting port 315.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9(C), the electric support member 36 is located between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable winning device 316 and the upper part of the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-like member that is placed downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9(C), a pair of wall portions 361 are provided that protrude above the edge in the width direction. These wall portions 361 function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the upstream end on the right side (upstream side) to the downstream end on the left side (downstream side). A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36. The plurality of delay guides 364 extend in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and are formed in an inclined shape with a distal end located on the left side (downstream side) compared to a proximal end. Therefore, the plurality of delay guides 364 (delay parts) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a meandering path back and forth. Here, if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profit than expected, but this point will be described later.

Note that the configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a staggered manner, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-like member. Note that typical modifications of the electric support member 36 will be described later as thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

By the way, as mentioned above, the electric support member 36 is configured to support the normal symbol winning that is triggered by the detection of passage of the game ball through the through gates 318 and 319 in the special symbol game state in which the special symbol game is executed. It is activated when the lottery result is a win. In addition, the operating time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position, or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319. The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is short (for example, 0 .6 seconds), and in modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36, while the electric The time during which a game ball that has moved to the support member 36 or a game ball that is guided by the first evacuation guide nail 393 and second evacuation guide nail 394 and received by the electric support member 36 (described later) cannot enter the prize in the second starting port 315 (for example, 0 .6 seconds). In addition, for one or both of the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing the normal symbol winning lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected.

Here, game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting are distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game balls in the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L, and the game balls enter the left first starting port 314L. The game balls in the second passage 352 fall toward the right first starting port 314R. If the electric support member 36 is not operating, the game ball falling from the second passage 352 will enter the right first starting port 314R, and if the electric support member 36 is operating, it will be second started by the support of the electric support member 36. It is guided to the mouth 315. On the other hand, a game ball that flows down the right side of the sorting device 35, such as when a ball is hit to the right, is not introduced into the sorting device 35 and therefore does not enter the first starting port 314, and does not enter the electric support member. 36, if the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (Mode A to Mode C), the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. However, the player does not enter the second starting port 315. Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first starting port 314R and has a delay guide 364, the electric support member 36 is moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time it takes for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Therefore, in modes A to C where the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects the game balls on the life nail 31H and uses the sorting device 35 to move the game balls to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315. Left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to win game balls. On the other hand, in mode D and mode E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time it takes for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 that has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is better to allow the game balls to pass through the second through gate 319 and to win the game balls to the second starting port 315 using the electric support member 36, since the sorting device has a possibility that the game balls will enter the first starting port 314. This is more advantageous to the player than using 35. Therefore, in modes D and E where the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, right-handed hitting is encouraged.

By the way, some conventional game machines are equipped with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section whose function is different from that of the first starting section. However, when the distribution device alternately distributes game balls to the first starting section and the second starting section, there is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device 35 that alternately distributes game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, the first passage A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below at the outlet of each of the passage 351 and the second passage 352. Further, in the sorting device 35, the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. Therefore, when the game ball is hit to the left to use the sorting device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351, and the game ball enters the left first starting port 314L. A state where the game ball enters the right first starting port 314R by the second passage 352, and a state where the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36 can be achieved. In addition, when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball does not enter the sorting device 35, and the electric support member 36 is activated when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319. A game ball may be guided to the starting port 315. In this way, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which game balls are distributed to two types of starting sections (first starting section and second starting section) with different functions, as in conventional gaming machines. Differently, by cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which game balls can be placed in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the first starting part is placed in a position where winnings can be made when playing left-handed, while the second starting part is placed on the right side of the game board along with normal electric accessories such as through gates and electric support members. Many of them can be seen placed in. In such a gaming machine, if you hit left-handed, the game ball can land in the first starting part, but the game ball cannot land in the second starting part located on the right side of the game board. When the game ball is hit right, the game ball can land in the second starting part disposed on the right side of the game board, but the game ball does not land in the first starting part. In general, it is more advantageous to win a jackpot in a jackpot lottery that is triggered by the winning of a game ball in the second starting part than in winning a prize with a game ball in the first starting part. For example, in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the second starting part, there is a high ratio of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot with a large number of rounds in a jackpot game. In a gaming machine where the function of the starting part that allows winning is different depending on whether the player is left-handed or right-handed, the gaming conditions include low jackpot winning probability and normal symbol winning probability variation, special symbol variation time, and regular symbol variation. It has a normal mode which takes a long time and a time-saving probability variable mode in which the jackpot winning probability and the normal symbol winning probability are high and the special symbol fluctuation time and the regular symbol fluctuation time are short. In addition, in the normal mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is low and the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory is short in the case of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory is short when the game ball enters the second starting part triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate, and the support of the normal electric accessory is performed infrequently. It can only be received by In other words, in the normal mode, even if you play right-handed, you will not only receive almost no benefit from the support of normal electric accessories, but also you cannot expect the game ball to enter the first starting part. It is a good idea to do so. On the other hand, in the time probability variable mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is high and the regular symbol fluctuation time is short, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory is long in the case of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving variable probability mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory is long, and the support of the normal electric accessory is increased when the game ball enters the second starting section triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate. You can receive it frequently. That is, in the time-saving probability variable mode, it is better to make the game ball win in the second starting part by hitting the right hand than to make the game ball win in the first starting part by hitting the left. In other words, by hitting left in the normal mode, you can land the game ball in the first starting part and play the first special figure game, while in the time-saving fixed variable mode, you can play the second special figure game by hitting right. The profit for the player is maximized. In addition to the time-saving variable mode, some gaming machines have a so-called latent variable mode in which the variable probability mode is not clearly indicated. In the latent probability variable mode, the probability of winning a jackpot is high as in the time-saving probability variable mode, but in general, support for ordinary electric accessories is the same as in the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability variable mode, the variation time of the normal symbol for the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the winning probability of the normal electric accessory actuation in the normal symbol lottery is low, so the second Normally, electric accessory support for winning game balls into the starting part can only be received for a short time and infrequently. Therefore, in the latent probability mode, if you hit right-handed, you can hardly expect to win the second starting part, so by hitting the game ball left-handed and placing the game ball in the first starting part, as in the normal mode, Playing special figure games is encouraged. Not only in the normal mode and the latent probability variable mode, but also in game states where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantages of right-handed hitting, such as making it difficult to receive support from normal electric accessories.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is equipped with the sorting device 35, it is not clearly indicated that the special figure gaming state is the variable probability mode (high probability mode), as in conventional gaming machines, and left-handed playing is encouraged. In mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 as well, it is preferable to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 even if the electric support member 36 is activated by right-handed hitting in mode C. In the gaming machine 10, a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay parts are provided on the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory. Here, if the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay parts, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in a straight path. move in the direction of On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36 as in this embodiment, the game balls 99 of the electric support member 36 meander from the right side (upstream side) to the left side ( downstream). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 in the electric support member 36, the movement distance in the electric support member 36 becomes longer, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 can be secured for a longer time. The time required for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special figure game state is the above-mentioned mode C, or when it is in modes A and B in which left-handed hitting is encouraged like mode C, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 due to a player hitting right, etc., the electric support member 36 will be removed before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since the game returns to the standby state, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 315. This makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 315 when the player uses a hitting method (right-handed hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed hitting). That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is possible to force the player to actively play left-handed hitting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5(A), above the electric support member 36, a plurality of nails are connected between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the distribution device 35. A first retreat guide nail 393 and a second retreat guide nail 394 (retreat guide portion) are provided. These retreat guiding nails 393, 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36, which is the right area of the sorting device 35, in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35. That is, the retreat guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second starting port 315 in the electric support member 36, and the game ball can It is possible to secure a long time until the second starting port 315 is reached. As a result, similarly to the case where the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to mode C. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the second starting port 315 in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to receive support from the electric support member 36 in the event that the ball is hit in a manner that is not recommended. Further, in the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide a first retreat guide nail 393 and a second retreat guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, while suppressing the complication of the manufacturing process and increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide part (the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394), when the electric support member 36 operates for a short time, It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36.

Note that, as the retraction guide portion, instead of the retraction guide nails 393 and 394, it is also possible to adopt a block-shaped member or the like formed by resin molding, metal processing, a combination thereof, or the like.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in mode D and mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). For example, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 has a short distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short time as in mode C, However, since it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 315, a prize can be won in the second starting port 315 even in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or the game ball that has been launched before or after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support Since the operating time of the member 36 is long, even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay part 364, the second starting port 315 is entered. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only game balls that pass through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and fall, but also game balls that flow down the right side area of the sorting device 35. A game ball that has fallen onto the stage 310 below the variable prize opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 are in a game state in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time because the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above. In mode D and mode E, left-handed hitting cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode D and mode E, which are gaming states in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, the player can move the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31. 36, it is encouraged to operate the firing handle 22 in a right-handed manner.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 10, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display section 37, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42. Then, the MPU 41 controls the general winning opening 313, the left first starting opening 314L, the right first starting opening 314R, and the second starting opening based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. Moreover, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command and a shift command to the audio lamp control device 5.

The variable pattern command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 and the main display section 37, the variation pattern command executes the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22 based on information stored in the special symbol holding storage area 412b, which will be described later. It is set in step S1808. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

The shift command is a voice lamp control that indicates that the special figure success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 has shifted when the number of pending numbers N decreases. This is a command to notify the device 5. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process in FIG.

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the changed clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts the main timer (described later) every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that interrupt processing is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery, etc. will be explained. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the counter information stored in the special figure pending storage area 412b to execute the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining the type of loss. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341. included. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal symbol per random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory, and a normal symbol per random number counter C4 used for setting the initial value of the normal symbol per random number counter C4. A normal symbol per initial value counter CIN2 is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the counter value (random value) at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random value) is acquired, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is determined by the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411 in low probability modes (Mode A, Mode B, and Mode D described below) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot. (See FIG. 13(B))), and a high probability mode (Mode C and Mode E (see FIG. 13(B)) to be described later) that have a high probability of winning a jackpot. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B), in the low probability modes (mode A, mode B, and mode D), the number of random numbers (0 to 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1/246.3). On the other hand, in the high probability mode (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random values) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low probability mode. It is 30/739 (= about 1/24.6), which is twice as much. Here, in the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table, the three random numbers (0 to 3) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is also possible that they are not common. In addition, the random numbers that result in a jackpot need not be continuous values, and may be partially or entirely discrete values. Note that if the counter value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random value) at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is individually set for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game according to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, there is a jackpot when the game ball enters the first starting port 314 (first special jackpot), and a jackpot when the game ball enters the second starting port 315 (second special chart jackpot). ) and the distribution of the jackpot type is different. Here, FIG. 12(C) and FIG. 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 12(C), in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first starting hole 314, the jackpot type is divided into either a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot. The number of random numbers that result in a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot is 15 from 0 to 14, the number of random numbers that result in a 2R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19, and the random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12(D), in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second starting hole 315, one of the 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will occur. Can be sorted. The number of random numbers that result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. Yes, there are no random numbers that result in a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a probability variable jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and probability variation jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot) in the second special symbol game. The probability is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution of the jackpot type is different between the first special drawing jackpot and the second special drawing jackpot, but the number of rounds played in the jackpot game is higher for the second special drawing jackpot than for the first special drawing jackpot. The second special drawing jackpot is more advantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting hole 314, which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game, and the game ball enters the second starting hole 315, which becomes an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game. An individual jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the winnings, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop fixed-change machine, but may also be configured as a gaming machine with specifications different from the loop fixed-change machine, such as a so-called limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, etc. . Note that examples in which the gaming machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a type-two type mixing machine will be described later as third to sixth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50. .

Then, based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, It is determined whether it is a 5R normal jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a loss. Specifically, for a winning in the first starting port 314, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a loss, and then enters the winning into the second starting port 315. Regarding winnings, it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a loss.

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened is repeated twice. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning hole 316b is opened is repeated five times. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game state shifts to a mode (game state) according to the jackpot type. Here, FIG. 13(A) is a mode transition table that defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode B after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode D after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends. That is, since the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot in the first starting opening 314L, 314R is a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R certain variable jackpot (see FIG. 12(C)), In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot when winning a prize on the second starting opening 315 is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability varying jackpot (see FIG. 12(D)), In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode D or mode E after the jackpot game ends.

Here, FIG. 13(B) shows the mode types (modes A to mode E) in the special pattern game state in which the special symbols change due to the landing of game balls into the starting ports 314L, 314R, and 315 in the gaming machine 10. This is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that is entered when the upper limit number of special symbol games is completed, that is, when the time saving ends in Mode B or Mode D, which is a limited time saving mode described later, and it is clear from the explanation below. However, among modes A to E, this is the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming state becomes mode A also when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. Note that if the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on, the gaming state becomes the gaming state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first gaming state) is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). be exposed. Moreover, mode A is a non-time saving mode in which there is no shortening (time saving) of the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes the position of the electric support member 36, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, winning at the second starting port 315 cannot be expected due to the support of the electric support member 36. Furthermore, mode A is a low probability per normal symbol mode in which a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability win/fail table in which the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win is low. Therefore, in mode A, except for irregular cases such as when a game ball accidentally passes through the second passage 352 at the timing of the operation of the electric support member 36, the first special figure game is executed, and the second special figure game is executed. is not actually executed.

Here, FIG. 13(C) shows an example of a normal symbol low probability correct/fail table. In the normal symbol low probability correctness table shown in FIG. 13(C), one counter value ( 199) corresponds to a winning lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to a losing lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability win/fail table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery will be a win is low, and if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery becomes a winning, the second starting port 315 will be transferred to the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. The level of expectation for the winning of game balls is low. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table will be a win is particularly important if there is a clear probability difference between the probability that the lottery result based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table described later will be a win. There is no limit, and the probability that the lottery result will be a win may be 0%, and it is also conceivable that the normal symbol winning lottery is not performed in mode A. In addition, in mode A, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. As described above, above the electric support member 36, there is a retraction guide nail 393 that guides the game balls flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5(A)). Therefore, in mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is limited to the game ball that flows down the right side of the game board 31 due to right-handed hitting. is short, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support winning into the second starting port 315 in the case of right-handed hitting. In addition to this, since the probability of winning the lottery result in the above-mentioned normal symbol winning lottery is low, in mode A, the game ball enters the second starting slot 315 which is distributed to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. can hardly be expected. Furthermore, when playing right-handed, not only cannot the support of the electric support member 36 be expected, but also the introduction of game balls into the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, the game balls are caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by left-handed hitting, the game balls are introduced into the sorting device 35, and the game balls enter the first starting ports 314L and 314R to receive a jackpot lottery. This is encouraged.

In this way, in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is low, and the actuation timing of the electric support member 36 is different from the passing timing of the game ball. Therefore, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot drawings are performed for winning game balls into the first starting openings 314L, 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot. As a result, it is extremely easy to shift from mode A to mode B or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and there is virtually no shift to mode D or mode E.

Mode B (fourth gaming state) is a mode to which the player enters after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than mode A. be.

Mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, similar to mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (A)). . In addition, unlike Mode A, Mode B is a time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the maximum number of times the special figure game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times in which an upper limit is set on the number of times of time-saving, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can win a prize in the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 It is set depending on the positional relationship (distance, etc.) with respect to the electric support member 36 and the operating time of the electric support member 36, and is set to be, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed on the effect means such as the symbol display section 341. In this case, the effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of a certain change. Note that in mode B, if the upper limit number of special figure games are played without the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot, the mode shifts to mode A.

Furthermore, mode B is a mode in which a normal symbol winning lottery is carried out based on a normal symbol high probability win/fail table in which the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery has a high probability of winning, and in this respect it is also an advantageous mode than mode A. be. Here, FIG. 13(D) shows an example of a normal symbol high probability correct/fail table. In the normal symbol high probability success/failure table shown in FIG. 13(D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random values) of the normal symbol random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) are the normal symbol per lottery. The remaining one (199) corresponds to a winning lottery result, and the remaining one (199) corresponds to a losing lottery result. In other words, in the normal symbol high probability success/failure table, the counter value (random value) for winning and losing is opposite to the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is 99.5. % (199/200). Therefore, in mode B, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. Note that the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table will be a win does not need to be 99.5%, and may be any other percentage. In addition, in mode B, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so. In addition, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery may be set to 100%. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won, as in mode A. It is not possible to expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 due to the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode B, like mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged.

In this way, in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so left-handed hitting is encouraged instead of right-handed hitting, but unlike mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is lower. Since the game ball is high, it can be expected that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Specifically, when game balls are introduced into the distribution device 35 as described above, the game balls are alternately distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The game balls distributed to the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318. At this time, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability win/fail table per normal symbol. Therefore, the game ball that has been sorted into the second passage 352 and passed through the first through gate 318 is supported by the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in this embodiment) and reaches the second starting port 315. Win a prize. In addition, if the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a loss, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R.

In mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning the game ball to the second starting port 315. On the other hand, this is done with a probability of 0.25% when the game ball enters the right first starting port 314R. As a result, in the jackpots in mode B, about half (50.25%) become 2R normal jackpots or 2R probability variable jackpots, and after the jackpot games for these jackpots are completed, the game shifts to mode B or mode C. In addition, in mode B jackpots, about half (49.75%) result in 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, or 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game for 5R normal jackpot, mode D is entered, and 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot occur. After the jackpot game for the 16R probability-variable jackpot ends, the game shifts to mode E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode B, with the support of the electric support member 36, in about half of the special figure games, you can receive a jackpot lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315, so the 5R normal jackpot, which is expected to have a large number of wins, It is possible to expect to win the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the game shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and after the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot ends, the mode shifts to a mode that is more advantageous than mode B. This mode (gaming state) is more advantageous for the player than mode A in this respect as well.

Mode C is a mode to which the mode shifts after the end of the 2R probability variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is a mode (gaming state) more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (B)). , is a mode (gaming state) more advantageous to the player than modes A and B in this respect. Further, mode C is a time-saving mode like mode B, but unlike mode B, the time-saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. In other words, mode C is a guaranteed jackpot time-saving mode that guarantees a jackpot next time, and is a more advantageous mode (gaming state) than mode B in this respect as well. In addition, in this embodiment, the fact that it is mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the presentation by the presentation means such as the symbol display section 341 for special pattern games and jackpot games. That is, mode C is a so-called latent probability variable mode. Of course, in mode C, it is possible to clearly indicate in the presentation means that it is a high probability mode, and similarly to mode B, it may be made clear in the presentation means that it is a time saving mode, suggesting the possibility that it is a variable probability mode. A performance may be performed using a performance means as a chance zone.

Furthermore, in mode C, similar to mode B, the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability win/fail table, but similarly to mode A and mode B, electric support is provided when winning the normal symbol winning lottery. Since the operating time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), it cannot be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 when the player is right-handed. Therefore, even in mode C, left-handed hitting is encouraged. In addition, in mode C, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, but when a gaming ball passes through the second through gate 319, a normal symbol winning lottery is not performed. It is also possible to do so. In addition, in mode C, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the probability of winning in a normal symbol winning lottery may be set to 100%, and when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a normal symbol The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

In this way, in mode C, as in mode A and mode B, left-handed hitting is encouraged because the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, but the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win is low. Since the game ball passes through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and in this respect, it is also better than mode A. This is an advantageous mode (gaming state). In mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning the game ball to the second starting port 315. This is done with a probability of 0.25% when the game ball enters the right first starting port 314R. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode C and the mode to which the jackpot game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game are the same as in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, in about half of the special figure games, you can receive a jackpot lottery for winning the game ball in the second starting hole 315, so you can receive the 5R normal jackpot, which is expected to win a lot, and the 5R jackpot. It can be expected to win the probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends, the game shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A and similar to mode B, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

Mode D is a mode to which the mode shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is a mode (gaming state) more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. Mode D, like Mode A and Mode B, is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 12 (A)). will be carried out. Further, like mode B, mode D is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times, and shifts to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are played. Furthermore, mode D is performed based on a high probability win/fail table in which the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery has a high probability of being a win, and is similar to mode C in this point as well. In addition, in mode D, the time-saving mode is clearly indicated in the presentation by the presentation means such as the symbol display section 341. In this case, the effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of a certain change.

However, unlike Modes A to Mode C, Mode D has a longer operating time for the electric support member 36 (for example, 6 seconds) when winning a normal symbol lottery, and is more advantageous than Modes A to C in this respect. mode (gaming state). In mode D, since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 and the game balls falling onto the stage 310 below the variable prize opening 316b are electrically operated. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36 . Therefore, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31. In addition, in mode D, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball almost never enters the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball enters the second starting port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode will shift to mode D after the jackpot game for this jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the mode will change after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends. Move to E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, and the jackpot lottery is not exclusively available for winning the game ball into the second starting port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is one of the following: 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which have a large number of game balls expected to be acquired. After the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the mode shifts to mode D or mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a longer time, so this mode (gaming state) is more advantageous than modes A to C in these respects.

Mode E is the mode to which the player enters after the completion of the 5R certain variable jackpot game or the 16R certain variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13(A)), and is the most advantageous mode for the player among modes A to E. be. Mode E, like mode C, is a jackpot high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot. ), and it is also a jackpot guarantee time saving mode that guarantees a jackpot next time. In addition, in mode E, it is clearly shown in the performance by the performance means such as the symbol display section 341 that the game is in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode).

However, in mode E, unlike mode C, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won, as in mode D. Therefore, in mode E, like mode D, right-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode E, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball almost never enters the first starting ports 314L, 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball enters the second starting port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode E and the mode to which the game will transition after the jackpot game ends are the same as in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery is exclusively available for winning the game ball into the second starting hole 315, there is a high probability of winning any of the 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which are expected to have a large number of wins. (approximately 100%) to win.

In addition, it is also possible that the electric support member 36 operates multiple times in response to a win in a single normal symbol winning lottery. For example, in mode D and mode E, the total operating time of the electric support member 36 may be set to 6 seconds by performing an operation of operating the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and number of operations of the electric accessory 36 described above are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 36 in mode D and mode E is not limited to 6 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when a normal jackpot such as the 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, the mode is changed to mode A, which is a non-time saving mode, or mode B, where the operating time of the electric accessories 36 is short, instead of mode D. You can. In these cases, mode D is omitted.

By the way, conventional gaming machines have a time-saving mode in which ordinary electric accessories such as electric support members operate frequently and for a long time, making it easier to win at the second starting slot, and a mode in which ordinary electric accessories such as electric support members operate infrequently and for a short time. Some have a non-time saving mode. In this type of gaming machine, the non-time saving mode is set in the normal game state where the jackpot lottery probability is low, and the time saving mode is set in the variable probability game state where the jackpot lottery probability is high.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the theoretical probability of being able to receive support from normal electric accessories in the time-saving mode is constant, so the gameplay in the time-saving mode is poor, and it is difficult to create new gameplay. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 includes mode A, mode C, and mode E as special figure gaming states. These modes A, C, and E have different expected values of the ball entry ratio in the first starting part and the second starting part. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio into the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting part and the second starting part is approximately 50%:50%. In mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, there is a new system with improved gameplay based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio in the first starting part and the second starting part are different. It becomes possible to create gameplay.

For example, although the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop probability changing machine, conventional loop probability changing machines have two modes: a mode in which the ball entry ratio to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and a mode in which the ball entering ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. However, in mode C of the game machine 10 of this embodiment, the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is approximately 50%:50. % mode. On the other hand, in order to enter mode E, which is most advantageous for the player to win a jackpot that gives a large amount of gaming value, typically the first win in mode A causes the player to shift to mode C, which is a high probability mode, and in this mode C, It is necessary to win a jackpot in a jackpot lottery triggered by winning the second starting slot 315, which has a probability of about 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through the stage of acquiring a jackpot at the second starting port 315 in mode C before shifting to mode E, and there are obstacles to be overcome in order to shift to mode E, which is the most advantageous. This gives the loop probability changing machine a new gameplay feature. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gameplay and interest while suppressing the monotony of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 further includes mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, as special figure gaming states, so it becomes easier to create new gaming features with improved gaming features. Specifically, as described above, the mode E is typically transferred from the high probability mode Mode C, but is also transferred from the low probability modes Mode B and Mode D. That is, there is a possibility that mode B and mode D, which are transferred because the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is normally a jackpot, may be transferred to mode E. Since mode B and mode D are low probability modes, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is lower than mode C, so mode B and mode D are shifted to mode E. requires a higher barrier to overcome than when moving from mode C to mode E. In addition, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, whereas in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so in mode B and mode D, it is easier to enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, the height of the barrier that must be overcome in order to shift to mode E is different between mode B and mode. In this way, by having Mode B and Mode D as special figure game states, the gameplay has multiple barriers (three types of barriers in this embodiment) of different difficulty to be overcome in order to transition to Mode E. It is given to the loop definite change machine. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the gameplay and interest while suppressing the monotony of the game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display on the symbol display section 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs. Here, reach refers to a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur during the period from when the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display section 341 starts until when the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuating. Furthermore, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines rough variation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as special figure game effects. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes a main process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating a variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern while referring to a low probability mode jackpot variation table, a high probability mode jackpot variation table, or a loss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 according to the lottery result. Identify the type. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided depending on whether the current gaming state is a low probability mode or a high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each of modes A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display 371, the second special symbol display 372, and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 37, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery. A variable pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display section 341 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and performance type displayed in . Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights up or blinks the illumination section 27. , turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display on the symbol display section 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It turns out. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is used for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 for a predetermined period of time. This is a loop counter that returns to 0 after the The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 14, which will be described later, and the counter value (random value) is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Based on this counter value (random value), a normal symbol winning lottery is performed. To win a normal symbol winning lottery, please make sure that the normal symbol is not displayed fluctuatingly (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not flashing) at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, and that the jackpot game is played. This is carried out every time a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, provided that it is not being executed and that the electric support member 36 is not operating. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired for the normal winning lottery, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. .

The special figure holding area 412b includes a first special figure holding area RE1, a second special figure holding area RE2, a third special figure holding area RE3, a fourth special figure holding area RE4, a fifth special figure holding area RE5, and a sixth special figure holding area RE5. It includes a special figure holding area RE6, a seventh special figure holding area RE7, an eighth special figure holding area RE8, a special figure holding number storage area NA, and a special figure execution area AE.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the special pattern validity information is stored in any of the first special pattern holding area RE1 to the eighth special pattern holding area RE8. There is no distinction between winning game balls for the first starting port 314 and winning games for the second starting port 315, and they are stored in the order of winning. The special figure success/failure information includes numerical information that is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are acquired when the game ball enters the starting hole 314, 315. The starting opening information (special drawing information) that can distinguish whether the winning is for the first starting opening 314 or the winning for the second starting opening 315 and the mode when the special drawing winning/falsifying information is acquired. It includes mode information for each type (mode A to mode E).

In addition, corresponding to each of the winnings for the first starting opening 314 and the winnings for the second starting opening 315, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1) etc.) may be provided individually.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is set to any one of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. It is stored separately. In addition to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that is executed based on the special pattern validity information stored in the first special pattern storage area RE1 to the eighth special pattern storage area RE8, the drawings are displayed on the pattern display section 341. It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting port 314, 315, the special figure winning/failing information is the first special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, and the fourth special figure holding area RE3. They are stored in vacant areas in priority order: special figure holding area RE4, fifth special figure holding area RE5, sixth special figure holding area RE6, seventh special figure holding area RE7, and eighth special figure holding area RE8. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number of the first to eighth special figure reservation areas RE1 to RE8 in which special figure validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number N. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 are used to record the winning history of game balls entering the starting openings 314 and 315. It is possible to hold up to 8 pieces of special drawing winning information in order of winning.

The special figure execution area AE is a memory used to move the special figure validity information stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341 is started. It is an area. Then, at the start of one first special figure game or second special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information and mode information stored as special figure success/failure information in the special figure execution area AE. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a lottery is performed to allocate the jackpot type based on the starting opening information (special pattern information) stored as the special pattern validity information. In addition, when the special figure validity information of the first special figure holding area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, priority is given to the special figure validity information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8, respectively. The area is shifted to the first special figure holding area RE1 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7, which are one level higher in rank. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure winning/falsifying information is stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 in the order of winning, regardless of whether the game ball is won in the first starting port 314 or the game ball is won in the second starting port 315. ~ The special figure execution area is stored in the 8th special figure holding area RE8, and the special figure success/failure information is stored in the winning order without distinction between the winning of the game ball for the first starting opening 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting opening 315. By shifting to AE, a special figure game based on the special figure validity information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is what is called MAX8 in terms of holding and extinguishing the special pattern winning/failing information (execution of the special drawing game).

The normal pattern random number storage area 412c is a normal pattern random number counter C4 that is acquired by the MPU 41 at the timing when the passing of the game ball is detected by the ball entrance sensors 318a, 319a when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319. This is a storage area where the counter value (random value) is stored. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 for a plurality of normal symbols is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c, and the normal pattern changes at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The through gate 318 is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not flashing), the jackpot game is not being executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319, the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the jackpot lottery. Further, when the count value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in special figure game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, when executing a game performance, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp controller 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 can be considered.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, etc. based on commands input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed on the symbol display section 341, the audio output from the speaker 26, the illumination section It is also possible to control the blinking mode of 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern and a production type based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol on the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, if the variable pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a loss, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the loss is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a jackpot, a combination of main symbols according to the jackpot type is displayed. In addition, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information regarding the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and stores the information in the RAM 512 when determining the jackpot game production when the jackpot game start command is received. Refer to the stored information regarding the jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes variable display of the main symbol and effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. input from the audio lamp control device 5. .

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 contains variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display section 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a miss effect image, and an opening used in the jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as a performance image, an opening/closing performance image, an ending performance image, etc. are stored. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable display and effect display of the main symbol.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the dispensing device 132 is for dispensing game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to disburse game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores information in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium containing an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. As mentioned above, the firing interval of the game balls may be different between the special figure game state and the jackpot game state.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the firing control IC 81 determines that, based on the voltage value input in accordance with the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the greater the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasure switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, if the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state. I judge that there is. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, etc. is determined. At this time, if the passing of the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal symbol random number counter C4, and when these counter values reach the maximum value. If so, the corresponding counter value is set to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes a starting winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

The launch control process starts the launch of game balls on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of enabling. On the other hand, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, the MPU 41 stores data in the regular figure random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Update the stored information. Note that details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

[Start winning process]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 15.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the starting opening 314, 315 based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the starting hole 314, 315 (step S1101: Yes), it moves the process to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not entered the starting hole 314, 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is ended and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 14.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number N stored in the special symbol reserved number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (8 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG. 14. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special symbol validity information in a vacant reservation area with a high priority among the first special symbol reservation area RE1 to the eighth special symbol reservation area RE8 of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in FIG. 14, and the fluctuation type counter that is updated in step S1302 in the main process in FIG. 17, which will be described later. Obtain the counter values with CS1, and store those counter values (numerical information) in the RAM 412 in the empty holding area with the highest priority among the first special drawing holding area RE1 to the eighth special drawing holding area RE8 as special drawing validity information. Store as . Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the current starting prize is for any of the left first starting port 314L, right first starting port 314R, and second starting port 315, based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, and 315a. At the same time, starting port information for the specified starting ports 314 and 315 is stored in the first special pattern holding area RE1 to the eighth special drawing holding area RE8 as special pattern validity information. Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the gaming state (mode A to mode E) of the pending game for which numerical information has been acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928, and S1931 of the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure as special figure propriety information. It is stored in the reservation area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special symbol validity information before the special symbol validity information acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determining the validity of the jackpot in S1802 or S1803 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a pending command setting process is executed to set a pending command based on the confirmation result. Note that when the process in step S1105 is finished, the start winning process is finished and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 14.

[Through gate processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described. In the through gate processing, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319, a normal symbol hit is stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 317a, 318a. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 (step S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1202, and if it determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318, 319. (Step S1201: No), the through gate process ends.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the LED lamp of the normal symbol display 373 (blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36 during the variable display of the normal symbols. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is in operation based on the electric accessory operation flag that is set to ON in step S1508 of the normal electric accessory control process in FIG. 19, which will be described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (step S1203: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery while the electric support member 36 is operating. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not in operation (step S1203: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played. Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is determined based on whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag, which is set to on in step S1907 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 23, is set to on, for example. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing. That is, during the jackpot game, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped during the jackpot game, but the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped only in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The operation may be stopped, and the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening/closing execution modes. That is, at the ending, a normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 sets the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. A counter value (random value) is obtained (step S1205), this counter value (random value) is stored in the regular figure random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through gate processing is ended. That is, to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 on the condition that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress. Obtain a random value and store that random value.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be explained with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodic processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 outputs external output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute processing. For example, if a command such as a variable pattern command, a hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the MPU 41 determines that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 316b based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, it sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display section 341 to display the number of game balls paid out (balls paid out display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes normal symbol control processing. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area 412c. A winning lottery will be held. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes normal electric accessory control processing. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 for an operation time corresponding to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure game state. Note that details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes special figure game control processing for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the special figure game control process will be described later, but in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 14, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1302 and S1311. Based on each value, a variable pattern command indicating the variable display time and the jackpot lottery result is set in the RAM 412, and the first special symbol display 371 and second special symbol display 372 of the main display section 37 display variable patterns. and controls the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an opening/closing execution mode for controlling opening/closing of the opening/closing door 316c is executed. In this opening/closing execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316b is executed multiple times depending on the jackpot type. This allows the player to acquire many game balls in the jackpot game. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending), at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending) ) etc., set various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open/close execution mode start command, and an open/close execution mode end command in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game, and sets the jackpot game start flag, the jackpot game Controls the on/off of flags such as the end flag, the opening/closing execution mode start flag, and the opening/closing execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the judgment result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, which will be described later. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state and modes A to E when predetermined conditions are met. Note that details of the gaming state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process moves to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that it is not the timing to execute the next main process (step S1309: No), the MPU 41 waits until the timing to execute the next main process arrives, that is, until the timing to execute the next main process. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. Make it.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the variation type counter CS1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are set to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 17. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. In addition to performing a lottery, it also controls the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. When the counter value (random value) of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 is stored in the ordinary figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the counter value (random value) stored in the ordinary figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes). ) (step S1402), and the process moves to step S1403. On the other hand, when the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1413.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is to be performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)). If the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, if it determines that the normal symbol winning lottery is to be performed based on the normal symbol low probability correctness table (see FIG. 13(C)), The process moves to step S1404. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, one of modes B to E, the MPU 41 selects the normal symbol winning lottery from the normal symbol high probability win/fail table (FIG. 13(D) )), the process moves to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
If it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode to the normal symbol fluctuation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to 30 seconds, for example. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the random number storage area 412c is 199.

Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (step S1406: Yes), the process moves to step S1410, and if it determines that the lottery result is a loss (step S1406), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1410. :No), the process moves to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
If it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is one of modes B to E, the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the time saving mode in the normal symbol fluctuation display counter. is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time saving mode, and the time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, For example, it is set to about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the random number storage area 412c is between 0 and 198.

Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (step S1409: Yes), the process moves to step S1410, and if it determines that the lottery result is a loss (step S1409), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1410. :No), the process moves to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
If it is determined that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets on the normal symbol winning flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410). ). The ordinary figure hit flag is referred to in step S1503 of the ordinary electric accessory control process in FIG. 19, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373), further sets the normal symbol variable display flag to on (step S1412), and controls the normal symbol. Finish the process. The normal symbol fluctuation display started here is started when the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0, that is, the normal symbol fluctuation is set according to the mode type. After the display time has elapsed, the image is stopped and displayed in step S1415, which will be described later.

<Step S1413>
If the counter value (random value) of the normal winning random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 changes the normal pattern fluctuation display time set in step S1404 or step S1407. It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). If the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process moves to step S1414, and if the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process moves to step S1418. .

<Step S1414>
If it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ordinary symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414). . The ordinary symbol fluctuation display flag indicates whether or not the ordinary symbol is fluctuating, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, when the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter is 0 (step S1414: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on. , it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbol. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1415 when the common figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), and when the common figure variation display flag is set to OFF (step S1414: No), the normal symbol control process ends.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
If the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the normal symbol fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), it is the timing to stop displaying the normal symbol, so the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed by lighting or extinguishing the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 clearly indicates the lottery result of the normal symbol winning lottery in step S1405 or S1408 by the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is changing to OFF (step S1416), and sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to ON (step S1417). The ordinary symbol fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of ordinary symbols has been stopped, and is used to determine whether or not it is the timing to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1501 of the ordinary electric accessory control process, which will be described later. referred to for judgment.

<Step S1418>
If the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter, and displays the normal symbol. Control processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory control processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal electric accessory control process executed in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory for an operating time corresponding to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process in FIG. Determine whether it exists or not. If the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and moves the process to step S1503. On the other hand, when the ordinary pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
If the normal pattern variation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal variation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and checks whether the normal pattern hit flag is set to ON or not. is determined (step S1503). The normal symbol winning flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal symbol control process in FIG. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1504 when the flag per common map is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), and when the flag per common map is set to OFF (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1504. The normal electric accessory control process ends.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
If the normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is one of modes A to C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is one of modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a value for short-circuiting the electric support member 36 as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value is set (step S1505), and the process moves to step S1507. The initial value in the case of short-circuit operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode type is not one of modes A to C (step S1504: No), that is, if it is mode D or mode E, the electric support A value for long operation of the member 36 is set (step S1506), and the process moves to step S1507. The initial value in the case of long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts operating the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory in operation flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is used to determine whether or not to return the electric support member 36 from the operation position to the standby position in step S1511, which will be described later. Referenced.

Here, by starting the operation of the electric support member 36, the electric support member 36 moves to the operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is covered by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 9). See B). In this state, the game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 are restricted from entering the right first starting opening 314R. On the other hand, the game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36. When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36, the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Furthermore, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 can also be received by the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
When the ordinary figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0. A judgment is made (step S1509). The electric accessory operation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric support member 36 is not operating and is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, if the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric accessory activation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric accessory control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, is not operating, the MPU 41 turns on the electric accessory operation flag. It is determined whether it has been set (step S1511). The electric accessory operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operation flag is set to ON, so that the electric accessory is activated. It is determined whether it is the timing to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether it is the timing to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. If the electric accessory operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1512, and if the electric accessory operation flag is set to OFF (step S1511: No), the normal electric accessory control process ends.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory in operation flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is in operation to OFF (step S1513), and ends the normal symbol control process.

Here, by returning the electric support member 36 to the standby position, the right first starting port 314R is opened by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 8(C)). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315. Furthermore, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and entry into the second starting port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, as a starting part that triggers a jackpot lottery for transitioning to a jackpot game, there is a first starting part that allows a game ball to enter without receiving support from an ordinary electric accessory; Some have a second starting part that allows the game ball to enter with the support of an electric accessory. Furthermore, some gaming machines alternately distribute game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section using a distributing device.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game balls are sorted into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the sorting device 35, and the game balls are sorted into the second passage 352 by the sorting device 35. In this case, entry of game balls into the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. Specifically, when the electric support member 36 is not activated and is in the standby position (see FIG. 8(C)), the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 are transferred to the right first starting port 314R. While the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is activated and in the operating position (see FIG. 9(B)), the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Entering game balls is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, in addition to the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board 31, the electric support member 36 also guides the game balls released from the distribution device 35 to the second starting port 315. be able to. In this way, the gaming machine 10 is different from a conventional sorting device that sorts game balls into the first starting hole and the second starting hole. Furthermore, unlike conventional ordinary electric accessories, the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315, but also allows the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 352. At the same time, entry of game balls into the right first starting port 314R is permitted or restricted. Moreover, the game balls in the second passage 352 and the game balls hit right can be guided to the second starting port 315 by one electric support member 36. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate, so that the ball entry ratio between the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 can be changed. As a result, the game machine 10 can reduce the monotony of the game, and provide a game machine with improved interest and new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36. For example, by short-circuiting the electric support member 36 in modes A to mode C, and long-operating it in mode D and mode E (see FIG. 13(B)), mode E is most advantageous to the player, as described above. In order to make the transition to the next step, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a gameplay feature having a plurality of barriers of different difficulty. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-like member, and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described effects can be achieved at low cost with a simple configuration.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described. The special symbol game control process includes controlling the variable display and stop display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 371 or the second special symbol display 372, setting data in the special symbol holding storage area 412b, and managing the number of time reductions. etc., is executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game, and if it is playing a jackpot game (step S1601: Yes), it ends the variable game control process and stops playing a jackpot game. If so (step S1601: No), the process moves to step S1602. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the jackpot game and to OFF at the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and if the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: Yes), the process moves to step S1603. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1602: No), the process moves to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is set to ON in step S1810 in the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22, which will be described later, and when the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), It is determined based on whether or not the special symbol variation display flag, which is set to OFF in step S1605, is set to ON.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time since the start of the variable display of the special symbol has passed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result in the special symbol jackpot lottery, and If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process moves to step S1604, and if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the corresponding special figure game control process end.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the relevant symbol on the special symbol display 371, 372 that is currently displaying the variable among the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372. The symbols corresponding to the lottery results in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game are stopped and displayed (step S1604). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation displaying flag to OFF (step S1605), and sets the special symbol variation stop flag to ON, which indicates that the variation of the special symbol has been stopped (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
If the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number N stored in the special symbol reserved number storage area NA of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the number of reservations N is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special game control process. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not 0 (step S1607: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1608.

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing regarding the special symbol validity information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process in step S1608, it moves the process to step S1609. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol displays 371 and 372 to perform a variable display based on the special symbol validity information stored in the special symbol execution area AE, and causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the special symbol validity information. A variation start process is executed to set a variation pattern command for execution, and the special figure game control process is ended. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

[Data setting processing]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In the data setting process, the data in the special figure pending storage area 412b of the RAM 412 is updated and the process is executed.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b (step S1701), and further subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b. The special figure validity information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure validity information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure validity information in the second special figure holding area RE2 is moved to the first special figure holding area RE1, and the special figure validity information in the third special figure holding area RE3 is moved to the second special figure holding area RE3. move the special figure validity information of the fourth special figure holding area RE4 to the third special figure holding area RE3, and move the special figure validity information of the fifth special figure holding area RE5 to the fourth special figure holding area RE4. , move the special figure validity information of the 6th special figure holding area RE6 to the 5th special figure holding area RE5, and move the special figure validity information of the 7th special figure holding area RE7 to the 6th special figure holding area RE6. and moves the special figure validity information of the eighth special figure holding area RE8 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the special symbol validity information of the first to eighth special symbol reservation areas RE1 to RE8 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1704 is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of pending symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341, etc. will be changed. When the process of step S1704 is finished, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to the special symbol fluctuation start process of step S1609 in FIG. 20.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the special figure fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is mode C or mode E at the time of acquisition of the winning/falsifying information based on the mode information in the special symbol winning/failing information stored in the special drawing execution area AE of the special drawing holding storage area 412b of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not (step S1801). Here, in mode C and mode E, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special pattern winning/failure information stored in the special drawing execution area AE is determined to be a jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning/failure table. This is a mode in which it is determined whether the values match or not (see FIGS. 12(B) and 13(B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether the mode is such that the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(B)). When the special figure game state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a propriety determination based on the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 12(B)) (step S1802). On the other hand, if the gaming state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, if the gaming state is mode A, mode B, or mode D, based on the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(A)). A determination is made as to whether or not it is correct (step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a jackpot. When the result of the validity determination is a jackpot (step S1804: Yes), the MPU 41 calculates the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the special figure. The jackpot type is sorted based on the starting opening information (special figure information) included in the win/fail information, and the process moves to step S1806. For example, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the first starting opening (first special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, it will be either a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot. Sort the jackpot type. In addition, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the second starting opening (second special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probable variable jackpot, and 16R probable variable jackpot. Sort the jackpot type into one of the following. On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination is not a jackpot (step S1804: No), that is, if the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1806 without distributing the jackpot type (step S1805).

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 executes a lottery result flag setting process to set a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the judgment of success or failure in step S1802 or S1803, and the result of sorting the jackpot type in step S1805. Execute. In this lottery result flag setting process, the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R regular jackpot, the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result is a 2R regular jackpot, and the 2R regular jackpot flag is set when the lottery result is a 5R regular jackpot. The normal jackpot flag is set when it is a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a loss flag is set when it is a loss. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag are flags that indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot and also indicate the type of jackpot. In the game state transition process, it is referenced when the game state is transferred from the jackpot game state to mode B to mode E after the jackpot game ends, and is set to off when the game state is shifted to the target mode after the jackpot game ends. Ru. Further, the loss flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, and is set to OFF in step S1813, which will be described later. In this step S1806, when setting the lottery result flag, the stop display symbols of the special symbol displays 371 and 372 of the main display section 37 are also set according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 converts the variation pattern indicating the variable display time of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. Then, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command in the RAM 412 based on the variation pattern determined in step S1807 (step S1808). This variable pattern command may include a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the special symbol game. Of course, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery may be set as a separate command from the variable pattern command without being included in the variable pattern command. Note that the variation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display a symbol variation based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON (step S1810). The special symbol whose variable display has started is stopped after the variable display time (variable pattern) set in step S1807 has elapsed in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603 of FIG. 20: Yes and S1604). At this time, the special symbol stops at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag, which is set to on in S1917 or S1926 in the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later, is set to on, If set (Step S1811: Yes), the process moves to Step S1812, and if the time saving flag is set to OFF (Step S1811: No), the special symbol fluctuation start process is ended.

<Step S1812>
If the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the disconnection flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes). If the failure flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, if the result of the validity determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a failure, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813. On the other hand, if the losing flag is set to OFF (step S1812: No), that is, if the result of the success/failure determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the losing flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the losing flag to OFF (step S1813), and also performs S1917 or S1926 in the gaming state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24, which will be described later. The counter value of the time-saving counter that is set when the time-saving flag that is set to on is set to on is subtracted by 1 (step S1814), and it is determined whether the counter value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). Note that the counter value of the time saving counter indicates the remaining number of time saving times. If the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if the remaining number of time saving times is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode, the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to ON. (Step S1816), the process moves to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 23 in order to determine whether to end the time saving mode. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special symbol fluctuation start process.

<Step S1817>
The MPU 41 sets the time saving flag when the losing flag is set to OFF (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or when the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1816). is set to OFF (step S1817), and the special symbol fluctuation start process ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. In the gaming state transition process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state is shifted from the special pattern gaming state consisting of modes A to mode E to the jackpot gaming state including the opening/closing execution mode, and in the jackpot gaming state. After the end of the jackpot game, a process is executed to transition from the jackpot game state to one of the special figure game states modes B to E, depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state ( (See FIG. 13(A)). In addition, in the game state transition process, after performing the upper limit number of special figure games in mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, a process of shifting to mode A is executed (see FIG. 13(A)). Note that the details of modes A to E have already been explained, so the explanation of modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop flag, which is set to ON in step S1606 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. It is determined whether it is the timing to shift the gaming state to another gaming state. When the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1902), and moves the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbol whose variable display has been stopped is a jackpot. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not is determined by the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation, which are set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. The determination is made based on whether any of the jackpot flags is set on.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a jackpot (step S1903: Yes), the process moves to step S1904, and when it determines that the lottery result is not a jackpot (a loss) (step S1903: No), The process moves to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, the MPU 41 determines whether a time saving flag, which is set to on in step S1917 or S1926, which will be described later, is set on. The time saving flag indicates that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times. If the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to on (step S1904: Yes), that is, if it is a jackpot in mode B or mode D, the MPU 41 turns off the time saving flag to end the limited time saving mode. (step S1905), and the process moves to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to OFF (step S1904: No), that is, when it is a jackpot in mode A, mode C, or mode E, the process moves to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, and further sets the jackpot gaming state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game status flag indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and is referenced, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process in FIG. 16 to determine whether a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908), and sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which mode from mode A to mode E is the mode type in the special figure game state, and in this step S1908, it is set to on when transitioning to the jackpot game state. Set the current mode type flag to off.

Note that the mode type flags include a mode A flag that is set on in step S1912 and indicates mode A, a mode B flag that is set on in step S1919 and indicates mode B, and a mode B flag that is set on in step S1919 and indicates mode B. A mode C flag is set on and indicates mode C, a mode D flag is set on in step S1928 and indicates mode D (see FIG. 24), and a mode D flag is set on in step S1931 and indicates mode D. It also includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving end flag, which is set to on in step S1816 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. is determined (step S1909). The time saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games have been executed in the limited time saving mode (the remaining number of time saving times is 0), and is a flag for ending the time saving mode.

When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to OFF (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without transitioning to mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to OFF (step S1910). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the mode type from mode B or mode D, which is a time saving mode, to mode A (step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag to ON (step S1912), and sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to mode A to OFF (step S1913), and Finish the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when the MPU 41 determines that the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), it is set to on in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to shift to one of modes B to E as the jackpot game ends.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), it sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and moves the process to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1914: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without transitioning to mode B to mode E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R normal jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 2R normal jackpot. If the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1916: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1917, and if the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1916: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1917. The process moves to step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time saving times as a time saving counter. The number of time saving times is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S1919). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1920), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 2R probability variable jackpot. If the 2R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1921: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1922, and if the 2R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1921: No), the process proceeds to step S1922. The process moves to step S1925 in FIG.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
In step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode C, and further sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S1924), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the type of the finished jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. If the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1925: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926, and if the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1925: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926. The process moves to step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 turns on a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving mode is limited to the number of times. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time saving times as a time saving counter. The number of time saving times is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to ON (step S1928). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1929), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
In step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E and further sets the mode E flag to on. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and all of the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, and 5R normal jackpot flag are set to OFF (steps S1916, S1921, and S1925 (No), it can be determined that either the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to OFF (step S1932), and ends the game state transition process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1951), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1952), a counter update process (step S1953), and a command determination process (step S1952). S1954), special figure game performance processing (step S1955), and jackpot game performance processing (step S1956) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
In the operation detection process of step S1951, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes a process for sequentially updating, for example, the history of the past three operations. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process of step S1952, the MPU 51 sets an operation pattern flag according to the operation state of the operation button 20 based on the operation history of the past three times, for example. The operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined based on this operation pattern flag. The operation states include a start state of operation on the operation button 20, a continued state of operation on the operation button 20, an end state of operation on the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process of step S1953, the MPU 51 updates the performance type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the performance type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The production type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and production type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuating display counter is for measuring the fluctuating display time of decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the fluctuating display counter is set to 0 when the remaining fluctuating display time becomes 0. Set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the decorative symbols are being varied, that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S1954, the MPU 51 determines the command received from the main controller 4, and executes the process corresponding to the command. For example, commands received from the main controller 4 include a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp controller 5, but a description of these commands will be omitted.

The variable pattern command is a command that indicates the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is executed in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 22 based on the information stored in the special symbol holding storage area 412b when starting the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol displays 371, 372. It is set in step S1808. When receiving the variable pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game performance and jackpot game performance to be executed by the symbol display section 341 etc. in accordance with the content specified by the variable pattern command.

The reservation command is a command that indicates, when the reservation number N stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the fluctuation pattern, and the reservation number N. The reservation command is set in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b when the number of reservations N increases.

The shift command is a command that indicates that when the number of reservations N decreases, the special symbol success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol retention area RE1 to the eighth special symbol retention area RE8 has shifted. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process in FIG.

[Special figure game production processing]
In the special figure game performance processing of step S1955, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game performance determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. Let it run.

[Jackpot game performance processing]
In the jackpot game performance process of step S1956, the symbol display section 341 displays the jackpot game performance (opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance, and ending performance) determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process in the jackpot game, for example. The speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. are made to execute the process.

As explained above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the conventional gaming machine is equipped with a sorting device that allocates game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section whose function is different from the first starting section. Unlike the machine, a first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Furthermore, although the game machine 10 is provided with a normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in conventional game machines, this electric support member 36 is located downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when playing right-handed. It extends continuously between the side and the lower part of the exit of the game ball of the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay part 364. As a result, the electric support member 36 allows the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 and distributed to the second passage 352 when playing left-handed to enter the second starting port 315, and also allows the game balls to enter the second starting port 315 when playing right-handed. The game balls collected at 310 can be entered into a second starting port 315 to win a prize. In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or restricts the winning of game balls into the second starting port 315 depending on whether or not it is activated, and at the same time restricts or restricts the winning of game balls into the right first starting port 314R. Allow. In other words, the electric support member 36 is different from the ordinary electric accessories of conventional gaming machines, and by restricting the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315, the electric supporting member 36 prevents the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, by allowing the winning of game balls into the second starting port 315, the winning of game balls into the right first starting port 314R is restricted. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variable mode (mode C), and a time-saving probability variable mode (mode E), which are adopted in conventional gaming machines, as special figure gaming states. By working together with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the gameplay in the latent probability variable mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed batting is encouraged in mode A and mode C, and when the left-handed batting is performed, game balls enter the sorting device 35, and these game balls enter the first passage 351. and the second passage 352 alternately. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by performing right-handed hitting, you can receive support from the electric support member 36 for a long time and with high frequency, and as a second special figure game until the transition to the jackpot game state. Only the special figure game is executed. In other words, in mode E, the rate of balls entering the second starting port 315 is 100%, similar to the time-saving variable probability mode of conventional gaming machines in which the high probability mode is executed by right-handed ball hitting without using the distribution device 35. It is.

In mode A, the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 enter the left first starting port 314L. Moreover, since mode A is not the time saving mode, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. That is, in mode A, although the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 are (first starting port 314L or right first starting port 314R). Therefore, in mode A, the ratio of balls entering the first starting port 314 is 100%, substantially similar to the normal mode of conventional gaming machines.

On the other hand, in mode C, as in mode A, left-handed batting is encouraged, and when the left-handed batting is performed, game balls enter the sorting device 35, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. When game balls are alternately distributed to the second passage 352 and distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls enter the left first starting port 314L. Moreover, unlike mode A, mode C is a time-saving mode, so the electric support member 36 operates to restrict the entry of game balls distributed to the second passage 352 into the right first starting port 314R. As a result, the player wins a prize at the second starting port 315. That is, in mode C, by playing left-handed, the game ball is distributed alternately to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 by the sorting device 35. Therefore, although mode C is a latent probability variable mode, game balls are distributed alternately to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, and the first starting port (left first starting port 314L) The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50% unless the result of the normal lottery is a loss.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different in modes A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode C (expected value is 50%). It has three gaming states: mode E (expected value is 100%); Therefore, it is possible to create a new game experience with improved playability based on the three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. In particular, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as MAX 8, the reservation is cleared in the order of winnings, so in mode C, the jackpot lottery at the first starting port 314 and the jackpot lottery at the second starting port 315 are alternately performed. Therefore, there is a probability of 1/2 that the jackpot type will be distributed by winning in the second starting port 315, and a probability of 1/2 is that the jackpot type will be distributed by winning in the first starting port 314. can receive.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game balls sorted to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R in mode A, and enter the second starting port 315 in mode C. Ball. This is because the game balls sorted into the second passage 352 are allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where it is not in operation. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position where it operates, the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the second starting port is restricted. This is achieved by arranging the electric support member 36 to allow the game ball to enter the mouth 315, and by making the operation time of the electric support member 36 different between modes A and C. . In this way, the electric support member 36 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315, but also allows game balls distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the right first starting port 314R. Allowing or restricting the entry of game balls at the same time. In other words, by the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 working together, the ratio of game balls entering the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 can be changed in mode A and mode C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining game machine that has new gameplay characteristics depending on the manner in which the operation of the electric support member 36 is controlled.

In the game machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 315, so that, for example, in a game state (mode A or mode C) where left-handed hitting is encouraged, the player Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 due to a right-handed hit, etc., the delay guide 364 can ensure a long time until the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. As a result, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 can be prevented from reaching the second starting port 315 from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 until the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position, so a game in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. By eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in this state, it is possible to force the player to actively play left-handed.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In addition, in other embodiments described below, the same configurations and steps similar to those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and step numbers. The explanation below will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second to Sixth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the gaming machine 10 is configured as a loop probability changing machine and the special symbol game is executed in any of the five gaming states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from the above-described first embodiment. The second to sixth embodiments will be individually described below.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol game is executed in one of three gaming states: mode A, mode C, and mode E. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the special figure game state does not include mode B and mode D, which are time saving modes limited to the number of times. Furthermore, since the special figure game state is composed of three modes, Mode A to Mode C, the mode transition is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 26(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 26(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 26(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26(A) is the same as that in the first embodiment described above. That is, in this embodiment as well, the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into either the 2R guaranteed variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the jackpot due to winning in the second starting opening 315 The jackpot in the 2-special figure game is divided into one of 5R probability-variable jackpot, 16R probability-variable jackpot, and 5R regular jackpot. Of course, the distribution of the jackpot types may be different from that in the first embodiment described above, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. , and mode E, mode C, and mode A are the gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. If the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game executed using the jackpot as a trigger ends. That is, after the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, in the case of a normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A, and in the case of a probability-variable jackpot by winning the first starting opening 314L, 314R. The mode is shifted to mode C, and in the case of a jackpot with variable probability in winning the second starting opening 315, the mode is shifted to mode E.

FIG. 26(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 2R normal jackpot at 25%, 2R probability strange jackpot at 25%. It is 75%. Therefore, from mode A, the game basically shifts to mode A or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the distribution of jackpot types in the first special figure game is 25% for 2R normal jackpot and 75% for 2R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 5R probability variable jackpots, 50% for 16R probability variable jackpots, and 25% for 5R regular jackpots. Therefore, from mode C, it is possible to shift to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode C is 37.5%. , the probability of transition to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 5R probability variable jackpot, 50% for 16R probability variable jackpot, and 25% for 5R regular jackpot. %. Therefore, from mode C, the mode is basically shifted to mode A or mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25% and the probability of shifting to mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 does not execute mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIG. If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 regarding the time saving flag in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 23) ) is omitted, and if the lottery result is a loss, the game state transition process is ended without changing the mode.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1900: No), and when the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17 is set to ON ( Step S1914: Yes), sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and executes processing to shift from the jackpot game state to mode A, mode C, or mode E depending on the jackpot type (step S2001-S2009). Steps S2001 to S2009 will be explained below.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag is turned on or not in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state. It is determined whether the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot is set to on in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22. .

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2002), and sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2003). ), the process moves to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process moves to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
If the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 22, is set to ON.

When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode C of the special pattern gaming state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S2005). S2006), the process moves to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a 2R probable jackpot (step S2004: No), the process moves to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
If the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode E of the special figure gaming states (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to ON (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), it sets the jackpot type flag to OFF (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot type flags among the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag. When the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to OFF, the MPU 41 ends the gaming state transition process.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special figure game state consists of three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no time-saving mode (mode B, mode D) with a limited number of times as a time-saving mode. Further, when the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode A, which is a non-time saving mode, after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, the proportion of stays in the time-saving mode is lower than in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the time-saving mode is a mode in which you can expect the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, so you can expect a 5R surefire jackpot or a 16R surefire jackpot that will trigger the transition to mode E. can. Therefore, since the stay ratio in the time-saving mode becomes low, it is difficult to shift to mode E, which is the time-saving mode, and the game property is such that it is easy to fall into mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a variety of mode transitions and a variety of prize balls that players can obtain.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, has been explained, but if there are three modes, there are three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode D, mode A, mode B, and mode E. There may be three modes: mode E, or three modes: mode A, mode C, and mode D. Further, the special game state may be 4 modes or 6 or more modes. As an example when the special game state is 4 modes, there are 4 modes: mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D; 4 modes: mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode E; mode A, mode B, and mode There are four modes: D and mode E.

Moreover, the special figure game state may include modes other than mode A to mode E. For example, the special figure game state includes, in addition to modes A and E, a slight time-saving mode in which the number of time-savings is limited to a small number, for example, the number of time-savings is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. Good too. The slight time-saving mode may include a difficult-to-support slight time-saving mode in which it is difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36, and an easy-to-support slight time-saving mode in which it is easy to receive support from the electric support member 36. A transition is made to the difficult support slight time saving mode after a jackpot game for a jackpot in mode A, and a transition is made to the easy support slight time saving mode after a jackpot game for a jackpot in the difficult support slight time saving mode. In addition, mode A is entered after playing a predetermined number of special figure games in the short time saving mode, and mode E is entered into a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 315, and the lottery result is a jackpot. In this case, the transition occurs after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10, which has four special game states including the difficult-to-support slight time-saving mode and the easy-to-support slight time-saving mode, has a high-probability mode right/fail table as a jackpot hit/fail table so that it can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to configure it as an ST or V-ST with an upper limit on the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed based on a table.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special figure game state consists of five modes, Mode A to Mode E, and there is no upper limit to the number of consecutive jackpots. On the other hand, in this embodiment, like the second embodiment, the special figure game state is in three modes: mode A, mode C, and mode E, and the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 12(A)) This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of jackpots from the so-called first jackpot continues up to a predetermined upper limit number. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine that has three special figure gaming states: mode A, mode C, and mode E.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 28(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 28(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 28(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, 28(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol fluctuation start process executed in step S1609 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. 20, and FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 28(A) defines the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the first embodiment described above, there are three types of jackpots in this embodiment: a 2R probability variable jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 16R probability variable jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variable jackpots. However, if the number of jackpots after the first hit reaches the upper limit, that jackpot will be treated as a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot lottery will be held based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (A)). The mode is forcibly shifted to mode A in which the process is performed.

In addition, the jackpot in the first special drawing game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into either the 2R fixed variable jackpot or the 5R fixed variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R fixed variable jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special figure game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variable jackpot, where you can expect to obtain a large amount of game balls, and there is a large distribution of the 2R probability variable jackpot, in which the expected value of the game balls obtained is small, You cannot expect to acquire a large amount of game balls. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special drawing game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 is divided into either the 5R fixed variable jackpot or the 16R fixed variable jackpot, and the allocation ratio between the 5R fixed variable jackpot and the 16R fixed variable jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special figure game, there is no distribution of 2R probability-variable jackpots, and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be obtained.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. , and mode E, mode C, and mode A are the gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the player wins a jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win, and shifts to mode A after the last jackpot game ends. Note that until the jackpot is won for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win, the game will not fall into mode A unless the remaining number of jackpots stored in the RAM 412 is erased. In addition, except after the end of the last jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314, mode C is entered, and by winning in the second starting opening 315. After the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special figure game ends, the mode is shifted to mode E.

FIG. 28(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, as mentioned above, you cannot expect to win a prize in the second starting hole 315, and the first special drawing game is executed by winning in the first starting hole 314, so from mode A, irregular cases except for 100% mode C. Note that since the mode A is shifted to after the last jackpot game is finished, the mode A is not shifted to after the jackpot game for the jackpot in mode A is finished.

In mode C, by performing a left-handed hit, a first special figure game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 and a second special figure game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 are executed alternately. Therefore, except after the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a jackpot in the first special figure game, the mode will shift to mode C after the jackpot game ends, and in the second special figure game by winning the second starting opening 315. In the case of a jackpot, the game shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately, so except for irregular cases, the probability of transition to mode C is 50%, and the probability of transition to mode E is 50%. becomes 50%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so from mode E, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game ends.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special symbol fluctuation start process has a difference from the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, steps S1811 to S1817 regarding the time saving flag and the time saving counter are omitted in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. When the special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition process ends. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment includes step S1805 of allocating the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1807) in the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. In place of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a special symbol type is set for setting the jackpot type flag and the special symbol type that was the target of the jackpot lottery. The difference is that a flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102) and a step of monitoring the number of probability-variable jackpots (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. In addition, this embodiment does not include mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, as the special figure game state, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the special figure of the above-mentioned first embodiment is not included. Steps S2101 to S2107 in the variation start process will be described below.

<Step S2101>
When the MPU 41 has distributed the jackpot type (step S1805), it sets a jackpot type flag (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets on one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. Note that in this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22 in the first embodiment, the out-of-order flag required for counting the number of time reductions is not set. Not done.

<Step S2102>
The MPU 41 sets a special symbol type flag that specifies the special symbol type that is the target of the jackpot lottery (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first special figure game is a jackpot, and sets the first special figure jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining set number M is 0 with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit. If the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and moves the process to step S1807. The initial number of sets Mmax is, for example, a predetermined number of sets from a range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, if the remaining number of sets M is not 0 (step S2103: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining number of sets M (step S2105), and determines whether the remaining number of sets M after the subtraction is 0. (Step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. If the remaining set number M after the subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, if the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. (Step S2107), the process moves to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won a number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in step S2202 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 30, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to transition to mode A. Furthermore, if the remaining set number M after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, if the current jackpot is not the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. The process proceeds to step S1807 without any further processing.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment does not include mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes with a limited number of times, as the special figure gaming state, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIG. 30, the above-mentioned In the game state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the steps related to the time saving mode are omitted, and the steps for transitioning to mode B and mode D are omitted. In addition, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment, if it is the final jackpot in the initial set jackpot, the mode A is shifted to, and the special symbol type in which the jackpot lottery was performed, which is the trigger for shifting to the jackpot gaming state. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode shifts to mode C or mode E depending on the situation (steps S2201 to S2212). Steps S2201 to S2212 will be explained below.

<Step S2201>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is set to on in step S2101 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. The jackpot type flag is set to OFF (step S2201). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF upon completion of the jackpot game.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot limit flag that is set to on in step S2105 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 29 is set to on (step S2202). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is the last jackpot for the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot limit flag for transition to is set to on. When the jackpot limit flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to OFF (step S2203), shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A (step S2204), and sets the jackpot limit flag to mode A (step S2204). The A flag is set on (step S2205), and the game state transition process ends.

<Steps S2206 to S2209>
The MPU 41 determines that the jackpot limit flag is set to OFF (step S2202: No), and the first special pattern jackpot flag that is set to ON in step S2102 in the special pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transfer of the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S2207), and also sets mode C of the special figure game state. (Step S2208), sets the mode C flag to ON (Step S2209), and ends the game state transition process. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the process moves to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
If the first special drawing jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special drawing jackpot flag is set to ON, and therefore turns off the second special drawing jackpot flag. At the same time as setting (step S2210), the mode is shifted to mode E of the special figure gaming state (step S2211), the mode E flag is set on (step S2212), and the gaming state transition process is ended.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes, Mode A, Mode C, and Mode E, which have different advantages for the player as a special figure playing state, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is predetermined. Continue until the specified upper limit. In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the mode transition destination differs depending on whether it is a jackpot in the first special figure game or a jackpot in the second special figure game. Therefore, in this embodiment, in mode E, where you can expect to obtain a large number of game balls with the number of sets remaining after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax - 1), how many sets of jackpots are left? It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having game features such as whether to shift to mode E or how much to distribute to the 16R jackpot game after shifting to mode E.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a jackpot in the first special figure game in mode A, the transition will be 100% to mode C after the end of the jackpot game, but in the case of a jackpot in the first special figure game in mode A The mode may be shifted to mode C at a certain rate, for example, 50%, and mode A may be looped at the remaining rate. By doing this, it is possible to provide a game in which mode A, which is disadvantageous for the player, may loop, and as a result, when moving to mode C, it is possible to make a large number of jackpots while still having a large number of jackpots when moving to mode C. The game quality is not only how to move to mode E, where you can expect to get a number of game balls, but also how to move to mode C, where you can expect to move to mode E, while leaving a large number of jackpots. It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having the following.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to mode A, mode C' and mode E', which are a high probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and a time-saving mode with a limited number of times, are provided as the special figure game state. There are 3 modes including: Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine that has variable probability jackpots for all jackpot types and shifts to a time-saving mode (mode C' or mode E') for a limited number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 31(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 31(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process in FIG. 17.

As shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 31(A), the jackpot in the first special drawing game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is distributed to the 2R probability-variable jackpot, and the jackpot due to winning in the second starting opening 315. The jackpot in the second special figure game is divided into 16R probability-variable jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, all the jackpots are probability-variable jackpots, and the jackpot types are distributed according to the special symbol types. Of course, in the distribution of jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.For example, all jackpots do not have to be variable jackpots, and variable jackpots and normal jackpots are predetermined. It is also conceivable that the amount may be distributed according to the ratio of .

As shown in FIG. 31(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as in the first embodiment described above. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are time-saving modes with a limited number of times. That is, mode C' and mode E' are high probability modes in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and a time-saving mode with a limited number of times. Here, the upper limit number of time saving times in mode C' and mode E' is set to be similar to the upper limit number of time saving times in mode B and mode D in the first embodiment, and is, for example, 50 times. Then, mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in this order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C' and mode E', the mode shifts to mode A. When the lottery result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. If the lottery result is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. That is, after the end of the limited time saving mode, the mode falls from mode C' or mode E' to mode A, and in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot by winning the first starting opening 314L, 314R, the mode is shifted to mode C', and the second In the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot in winning the starting hole 315, the mode is shifted to mode E'.

FIG. 31(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the type of jackpot in the first special figure game is 100% 2R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, from mode A, the game shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game executed in response to the jackpot ends.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. Moreover, as mentioned above, in the first special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, from mode C', if the lottery result becomes a jackpot before the end of the time-saving mode, the game will shift to either mode C' or mode E' after the jackpot game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger ends. Ru. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in mode C' without transitioning to the jackpot game state, mode C' is transitioned to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 100% 16R probability variable jackpot, so from mode E', the corresponding jackpot After the jackpot game executed triggered by this ends, the mode shifts to mode E'. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in mode E' without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that there are two types of jackpots: 2R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, so in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. Depending on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and the loss flag is set as the lottery result flag. In addition, in this embodiment, since the special figure game state is three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E', in the game state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the above-mentioned first The game state transition process of the embodiment (see FIGS. 23 and 24) differs in the mode transition process (steps S2301 to S2308). Steps S2301 to S2308 will be explained below.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, when the time saving mode ends and mode C' or mode E' shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 selects the mode C' flag set to ON or the mode Set the E' flag off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 controls the jackpot game state flag and time saving when the jackpot game end flag that is set to on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. When the flag is set to OFF (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether the 2R probability variable jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot.

If the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 performs a special The mode is shifted to mode C' of the gaming states shown in the figure (step S2303), and the mode C' flag is set on (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2305), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
If the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2302: No), that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 performs a special The mode is shifted to mode E' of the gaming states shown in the figure (step S2306), and the mode E' flag is set to on (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2308), and ends the gaming state transition process.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through mode C'. That is, in order to shift to mode E', after shifting to mode C' due to the first hit, it is necessary to achieve a jackpot in the second special figure game before the time saving mode ends. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special figure game in mode C' are 2R guaranteed variable jackpots, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is small and stays in mode A and mode C'. During this period, we cannot expect an increase in the number of game balls. On the other hand, in mode E' when hitting right-handed, the jackpot is 100% 16R, so you can expect to win a large amount of game balls in the jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, after shifting to mode C' after the first hit, how quickly can you get a big hit in the second special figure game and shift to mode E' where you can expect to acquire a large amount of game balls? It is possible to provide a gaming machine which has a game feature and further has a game feature of how many jackpots are won and a large amount of game balls are acquired in a time-saving mode after shifting to mode E'.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, unlike the first embodiment described above, this embodiment has three special figure game states, mode A, mode C', and mode E', similarly to the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to the time-saving mode for a limited number of times after the variable probability jackpot game ends, on the condition that a game ball enters the V winning hole of the special variable winning device in a specific round of the variable probability jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35(B) and 35(D) are plan views showing the essential parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36(A) is a jackpot type distribution table. FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table. FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are the steps of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process in FIG. 17.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31. The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b. As shown in FIGS. 35(A) to 35(D), the special variable winning device 82 includes an introduction port 821 for introducing the game ball 99 into the special variable winning device 82, and a closure for closing this introduction port 821. A movable tongue portion 822 is provided that is moved forward and backward with respect to the game board 31 by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 between the position and the open position where the introduction port 821 is opened. As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the standby position and the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822, the game ball 99 is moved to the special variable winning device. 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the open position and the introduction port 821 is open, the game ball 99 is inside the special variable winning device 82. can be introduced. In addition, when the special variable prize opening 39 is not operated, the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened when the movable tongue portion 822 is operated in the V winning round described below in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(E), inside the special variable winning device 82, a movable claw portion 823, a V winning hole 824, and a normal winning hole 825 are provided. The V winning hole 824 and the normal winning hole 825 are each provided with a ball entering sensor (not shown), and these ball entering sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 824 or the normal winning hole 825. be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a left tilted position that guides the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and a right tilted position that guides the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. be done. When the special variable prize opening 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the left and is on standby in a state in which it guides the game ball 99 to the V prize opening 824. The movable claw portion 823 changes from the left tilted state to the right tilted state when it is detected that a game ball 99 has won in the V winning opening 824 in a V winning round to be described later in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated. Rotated. Furthermore, when the V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left tilted state and waits in a state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the V winning opening 824.

As shown in FIG. 36(A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special drawing game due to winning in the first starting opening 314 is divided into a 4R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the first to fourth round games are executed as a game in which a game ball is won to the variable winning hole 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins a game ball is not executed. . Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be won in the V winning hole 824, and the game does not shift to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R variable jackpot game, for example, the first to fourth rounds are executed as a game in which the game ball is won in the variable winning hole 316b (see FIG. 4), and the fifth round game is a game in which the game ball is won in the variable winning hole 316b (see FIG. 4). It is played as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R variable jackpot game, the player can enter the time saving mode after the jackpot game ends by placing the game ball 99 in the V winning hole 824 of the special variable winning device 82 in the fifth round game. can. Also, since the 5th round game is executed as a V-winning round game, depending on whether the 5th round game, which is a V-winning round game, is executed after the end of the 4th round game, it will be 4R normal jackpot or 5R You can know if it is a guaranteed jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by performing a promotion performance (including a failure performance) after the completion of the 4-round game.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special drawing game due to winning in the second starting opening 315 is divided into a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. In the 10R certain variable jackpot game and the 16R certain variable jackpot game, a specific round game is a V winning round game. There may be at least one specific round game, and there may be two or more. Further, when the jackpot type in mode E' is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are set as a specific round game. By doing this, it is possible to know after the V winning round game whether there will be 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. Can be done. Therefore, after the execution or completion of the 10-round game, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by, for example, performing a promotion effect from a 10R probability-variable jackpot to a 16R probability-variable jackpot. In addition, regarding the distribution of the jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in mode A, the first special figure game is executed by performing a left-handed hit, so the probability change expectation level when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode A is 50%. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are limited time saving modes, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above. . In addition, in mode C', the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 by left-handed hitting, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode C' is It is 75%. In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so the probability change expectation level when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in mode E' is 100%. In this way, the present embodiment has three modes with different probability variation expectations, and mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36(C) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', if the upper limit number of special symbol games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, if the jackpot game ends when the lottery result is a 4R probability variable jackpot, and if the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot game ends without the game ball 99 winning in the V winning hole 824, the mode is shifted to mode A. When the lottery result is a 5R probability-variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that a game ball 99 wins a prize in a V winning hole 824 in a V winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that a game ball 99 wins a prize in a V-winning hole 824 in a V-winning round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36(D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 4R normal jackpot with 50%, 5R probability strange jackpot with 50%. It is 50%. Therefore, from mode A, after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to mode A at a rate of 50% and mode C' at a rate of 50%.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. In addition, as mentioned above, in the first special figure game, 50% is allocated to the 4R regular jackpot and 50% to the 5R definite variable jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 25% is distributed to the 10R probable variable jackpot, and 75% is distributed to the 16R probable variable jackpot. It will be distributed according to the ratio of Therefore, from mode C', if the lottery result becomes a jackpot before the end of the time-saving mode, the game shifts to one of modes A, C', and E' after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode transitions from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of jackpot types in the second special figure game is 25% for 10R probability variable jackpot and 75% for 16R probability variable jackpot, so mode From E', the mode shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that the game ball 99 wins in the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode E', and in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the game ball 99 wins in the V winning hole 824. If the jackpot game ends without any error, mode E' shifts to mode A.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, in this embodiment, there are four types of jackpots: 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. In the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the start process, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the lottery result flags are set as the 4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and loss flag. One of the following is set. In the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening 316b or the special variable winning device 82 depending on the jackpot type. To execute control for playing a jackpot game in which a round game is executed a plurality of times.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag set to on in step S2600 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. to decide. If the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it determines that it is not the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process proceeds to step S2402. The process moves to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402), and determines whether the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. flag) is set on or not.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step S2403: Yes), it sets a V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated according to the number of rounds of the variable probability jackpot (step S2404). ), the process moves to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as the V winning round in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as the V winning round in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot and a 16R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not a variable jackpot (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without setting the V winning round in which the special variable winning device 82 is activated.

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. Then, the number R of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the number of round games R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, sets the number of round games R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and sets the number of round games R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the number of round games R is set as ``10'', and when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set as ``16'' and stored in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes round games of the number R of round games according to the jackpot type in the opening/closing execution mode control process of step S2416, which will be described later. Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON (step S2406) and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2407, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start counting the opening time.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to on in step S2406 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has started. If the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2408, and if the opening flag is set to off (step S2407: No), the process moves to step S2415. Transition.

<Step S2408>
If the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time, which will be started in step S2409 described later, is being counted (step S2408). If the opening time is being counted (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2410, and if the opening time is not being measured (step S2408: No), the process moves to step S2409.

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts measuring the opening execution time and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time for which timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode in step S2410, which will be described later.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening time for which time measurement is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the opening. If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2411, and if the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 ends counting the opening time (step S2411) and sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag to ON (step S2413), and sets the 1 round start flag to ON (step S2214). The opening/closing execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether to shift to opening/closing execution mode processing in step S2415, which will be described later. Further, the first round start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the first round of the opening/closing execution mode in step S2501 of opening/closing execution mode processing in FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening/closing execution mode flag set to on in step S2413 is set to on. If the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON (step S2415: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2416, and if the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2415: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2416. The process moves to step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution mode control processing. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game that operates the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 multiple times depending on the jackpot type. Note that details of the opening/closing execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending flag, which is set to on in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, is set to on. If the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2418, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S2417: No), the MPU 41 executes the corresponding jackpot game control process. end.

<Step S2418>
If the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time, which will be started in step S2419 described later, is being counted (step S2418). If the ending time is being counted (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2420, and if the ending time is not being measured (step S2418: No), the process moves to step S2419.

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the ending (jackpot game) in step S2420, which will be described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending time for which time measurement is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the ending. If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2421, and if the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 turns off the ending flag that is set to on in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process in FIG. 39, which will be described later. ). Furthermore, the MPU 41 ends counting the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S2423), and ends the jackpot game control process. Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the gaming state transition process in FIG. The game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to one of mode A, mode C', and mode E' in accordance with the above.

[Opening/closing execution mode control processing]
In the opening/closing execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game in which the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is operated as described above is executed multiple times depending on the jackpot type.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, the MPU 41 determines whether the 1 round start flag set to on in step S2414 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to start the opening/closing execution mode (or not to start the first round in the round game). If the 1st round start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 1st round start flag to OFF (step S2502), and then moves the process to step S2506. On the other hand, if the 1-round start flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable prize opening opening flag that is set to on in step S2510 of the opening/closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable winning hole 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2511 of FIG. 39, and if the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503). :No), the process moves to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device activation flag, which is set to on in step S2508 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. If the special variable winning device activation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2514 in FIG. 39, and if the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the process moves to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable prize opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503: No) and the special variable prize winning device activation flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether the interval time exceeds a predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is a pause time from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game. That is, in step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether to end the interval and start the round game. If the MPU 41 determines that the interval time has exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process moves to step S2506, and if it determines that the interval time has not exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S2506. In order to continue, the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
If the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the round game scheduled to start is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 ( Step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is a V winning round (step S2506: Yes), it operates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable winning device 82 from a standby position where the introduction port 821 is closed to an open position where the introduction port 821 is opened. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device activation flag to ON (step S2508), and ends the opening/closing execution mode control process. The special variable winning device activation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is activated in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game scheduled to start is not a V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game scheduled to start is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b. 316c opens the variable prize opening 316b (step S2509). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening opening flag to ON (step S2510), and ends the opening/closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether the variable winning device 316 is operating (whether the variable winning opening 316b is open or not) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied. . Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning hole 316b was opened, or whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning hole 316b has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Decide whether or not. If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2512, and if the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are not satisfied. (Step S2511: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning a prize opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by returning the opening/closing door 316c (step S2512), and further closes the variable winning opening 316b. The release flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
When the special variable winning device activation flag is set to ON (step S2504 in FIG. 38: Yes), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has won in the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82. to judge. Whether or not a game ball has won in the V winning hole 824 is determined based on the detection result of a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning hole 824. In addition, in the special variable winning device 82, the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, so the game ball that is first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is placed in the variable claw portion 393 in the left tilted state. is guided to the V winning opening 824. When the MPU 41 determines that a game ball has won in the V winning opening 824 (Step S2514: Yes), it sets the V winning flag to ON (Step S2515), and tilts the variable claw part 393 of the special variable winning device 82 to the left. It is rotated from the state to the right tilted state (step S2516). That is, when it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 824, the MPU 41 guides the game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82 to the normal winning hole 825 by the variable claw portion 393 tilted to the right. .

<Step S2517>
If a game ball has not entered the V winning hole 824 (step S2514: No), or if a game ball has entered the V winning hole 824, the V winning flag is set to ON and the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the right. When the special variable prize winning device 82 is activated (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the special variable winning device 82 was started (after the introduction port 821 was opened by the start of the operation of the movable tongue portion 822). It is determined whether the number of game balls introduced into the special variable prize winning device 82 (the total number of game balls entered into the V winning hole 824 and the normal winning hole 825) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, nine balls). . If the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2518, and sets the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. If not established (step S2517: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
If the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue part 822, and returns the movable claw part 823 to the left tilted state, and when the next time the special variable winning device 82 starts operating, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821. The ball is guided to the V winning hole 824. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device activation flag to OFF (step S2519), and moves the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable prize opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2513) or when the special variable prize winning device activation flag is set to OFF (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts the number of round games R stored in the RAM 412 by 1. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether the round game number R after the subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the round game that ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. If the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2523, and if the number R of round games after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No). ), the process moves to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
If the round game number R after the subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts counting the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and executes the opening/closing execution mode control process. end. The interval time at which time measurement is started in step S2522 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG. 38 in order to determine whether it is the timing to operate the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
If the round game number R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game that ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In order to end the mode, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2523), and the ending flag is further set to on (step S2524), and the opening/closing execution mode control process is ended. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since there are two types of jackpots, 2R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, in step S1806 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. As a result flag, one of a 2R probability variable jackpot flag, a 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and a loss flag is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of special symbol fluctuation start processing is omitted. In addition, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, after the jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S1906, the jackpot game start flag is set to on (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that the jackpot game is started, and is referenced by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E', in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the above-mentioned first The process for mode transition is different from the gaming state transition process of the embodiment (see FIGS. 23 and 24) (steps S2601 to S2610). Steps S2601 to S2610 will be explained below.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, when the time saving mode ends and the mode changes from mode C' or mode E' to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 selects the mode C' flag set to ON or the mode Set the E' flag off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41, when ending the jackpot game (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917), sets the V winning flag to be set to ON in step S2515 of the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. is set to on (step S2602). If the V winning flag is not set to on (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag to on (step S2604). ), the process moves to step S2610. That is, in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, or if no game ball enters the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round in the variable probability jackpot game, the MPU 41 selects mode A which is neither the time saving mode nor the high probability mode after the jackpot game ends. to be transferred to

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set on in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22, to be on. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When the 5R probability-variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C' flag to ON. (Step S2607), the process moves to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-variable jackpot and a game ball enters the V-winning slot 824 in the V-winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 operates in a time-saving mode and with a high probability after the jackpot game ends. The mode is changed to mode C'.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 turns it on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that either the 10R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to is set to ON, the jackpot game state is shifted to mode E' of the special figure game state (step S2608), Furthermore, the mode E' flag is set on (step S2609), and the process moves to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, and a game ball is entered into the V winning hole 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 saves time after the jackpot game ends. mode and a high-probability mode E'.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 selects the jackpot type flag that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. The flag is set to OFF (step S2610), and the game state transition process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous for the player, after shifting to mode C', which is distributed with a 50% probability in the first hit, mode C' is set to the time-saving mode. By the end of the game, it is necessary to win a jackpot in the second special figure game, which is distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50%. That is, in this embodiment, except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, the probability of a variable jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E', and there are three levels. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with variable rate.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning hole 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316, but if the variable winning device 316 is provided with the V winning hole 824 that can be opened and closed, The configuration may be such that the V winning hole 824 is opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E. On the other hand, in this embodiment, like the second embodiment described above, there are three special figure game states: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a 1 type 2 type mixed machine that performs a type 1 game, which is a special figure game using the first starting port 314 and a second starting port 315, and a type 2 game using the feather accessory device. It is.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot success/failure table, FIG. 45(B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table for a type 1 jackpot, and FIG. 45(C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table for a type 2 jackpot. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45(E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing performed in the main processing of FIG. 46, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the wing accessory device control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process to be executed, FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process to be executed in the main process of FIG. 46.

As shown in FIG. 42, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a wing accessory device 83 provided on the game board 31. The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. 43, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 43) in which the introduction port 831 is closed. ) and an open position where the inlet 831 is opened (the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 43). In a state where the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44(A) and 44(B), when the movable wing section 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is open, the movable wing section 832 can receive the game ball. It is. The game ball received by the movable wing part 832 can be introduced into the interior of the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by a winning at the second starting port 315 is a small win (see FIG. 45(A)), and the movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position, and the movable wing section 832 is operated to the open position and the inlet port 831 is opened for a predetermined period of time. For example, the wing accessory device 83 is opened only for the time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) for 1 to 3 game balls to enter. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small win may be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing part 835 are provided. The V winning hole 833 and the normal winning hole 834 are each provided with a ball entering sensor (not shown), and these ball entering sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 or the normal winning hole 834. be done. The V winning hole opening/closing part 835 is operated by a solenoid ( (not shown) or the like. The V winning opening/closing part 835 normally waits in a closed position where the V winning opening 833 is closed. For example, when the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a small win, the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position. When the wing accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operating time of the movable wing part 832 in synchronization with the timing, for example, in E mode, the number of times the wing accessory device 83 is operated is the same as the number of time saving times, there is a probability of 50% to 80% that the V prize opening 824 will be opened. The V winning hole 833 is opened only during the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45(A) as a jackpot propriety table, the jackpot propriety table of this embodiment is not classified into high probability mode and low probability mode as in the first embodiment described above (Fig. 12(A) and FIG. 12(B)), the games are classified into a first special pattern game based on winnings in the first starting port 314 and a second special pattern game based on winnings in the second starting port 315. In the first special figure game, three of the counter values (random values) of the jackpot random number counter from 0 to 738 are jackpots, and the remaining 736 pieces, 3 to 738, are misses. The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (=about 1/246.3), similar to the low probability mode in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the second special figure game, like the first special figure game, three counter values (random values) from 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random values) of the jackpot random number counter from 0 to 738 are jackpots. Yes, the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1/246.3). That is, regardless of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a jackpot in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot in the type 1 game. Also, 723 pieces from 3 to 735 were small hits, and 3 pieces from 736 to 738 were misses. Here, the small win is a win that executes a two-way game in which the movable wing section 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined period of time. When the feather accessory device 83 is activated due to a small hit, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83, it becomes a jackpot in the second type game. That is, in the second special figure game, the main hit is the jackpot in the type 2 game, and like the second special figure game, the probability of a jackpot in the type 1 game is low. Hereinafter, a jackpot in a type 1 game where the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot will be referred to as a "type 1 jackpot", and a jackpot resulting from a game ball entering the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 will be referred to as a "type 2 jackpot". It is sometimes called.

As shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(B), the type 1 jackpot is divided into a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot. Further, as shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(C), in the type 2 jackpot, the winnings are divided into 4R time-saving jackpot, 8R time-saving jackpot, or 16R time-saving jackpot. Here, the number of time savings in each time saving jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small win probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of a small win, the operating time of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835, etc. In this embodiment, the number of times is 50, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, all jackpots for both type 1 and type 2 jackpots are time-saving jackpots, but the jackpot types are distributed so that a certain percentage (for example, 20% to 50%) of jackpots are non-time-saving jackpots. You can. In this case, the probability that the game ball will win in the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends in mode E' is that the probability that the game ball will be hit right-handed without special hitting methods such as stop-hitting or twist-hitting is As long as this is done, the V winning opening/closing part 835 may be operated so that the winning amount is 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. In addition, in mode E', the probability that the game ball will win in the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 before the end of the time saving mode is set to substantially 100%, and an upper limit is set on the number of jackpots from the first hit. You can. That is, the gaming machine 10 as a one-type and two-type mixing machine according to the present embodiment may combine the specifications of the limit machine according to the third embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 45(D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes: mode A, mode C', and mode E'. The contents of mode A, mode C', and mode E' are the same as in the fourth embodiment described above, and mode E', mode C', and mode A are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45(E) defines the destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E' which are time saving modes, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts to mode A. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the jackpot in the first special figure game is a type 1 jackpot, so from mode A After the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to mode C'.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed hit. That is, in mode C', a first special figure game in which the type 1 jackpot is 100% and a second special figure game in which the type 2 jackpot is the main one are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C', on the condition that the time-saving mode does not end, after the end of the jackpot game, there is a probability of approximately 50% (more precisely, a probability of slightly over 50%), and the transition to mode C' is approximately 50%. The mode will shift to mode E' with a probability of (to be exact, a probability of slightly less than 50%). In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without transitioning to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode transitions from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the main hit is a type 2 jackpot, with a type 1 jackpot occurring at a low probability (approximately 1/246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, from mode E', the game generally shifts to mode E' after the end of the jackpot game, and falls to mode C' with a low probability. In addition, as mentioned above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in mode E' without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A. Furthermore, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in mode E', mode E' may be looped without falling to mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has a jackpot winning table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45(A)), and can execute a two-type game in which the wing accessory device 83 is activated. , a part of the main process is different from the first embodiment described above, and the special figure fluctuation start process and the game state transition process in the special figure game control process executed as the main process are different.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of this embodiment, the wing accessory device control process is executed between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307 (step S2701). Note that details of the wing accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Feather accessory device control processing]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the wing accessory device control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 20, is set to on. (Step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to execute the type 2 game since the special figure game has ended. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), it moves the process to step S2802, and determines that the wing accessory device activation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S2801: No), the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 41 activates the wing accessory device which is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 48, which will be described later. It is determined whether the flag is set on (step S2802). If the MPU 41 determines that the wing accessory device activation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can be determined that it is the timing to operate the wing accessory device 83, so the process moves to step S2803. . On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), it can be determined that it is not the timing to operate the wing accessory device 83, so the wing accessory device control process end.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the wing accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803), and also sets the wing accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803). 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable wing section operating flag is set to on (step S2805). As a result, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and a game ball can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 by the movable wing portion 832. Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing part operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the interior of the feather accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 is placed in a state in which the V prize opening 833 can be won. Furthermore, the MPU 41 starts counting the operating time (step S2808). The time measured in step S2808 is used to determine whether it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 to the standby state and closing the V winning opening 833 in step S2810, which will be described later, or in step S2814. This is referred to by the MPU 41 in order to determine whether or not it is time to return the movable blade portion 832 and close the introduction port 831.

<Step S2809>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening/closing part to be set to ON in step S2807. It is determined whether the in-operation flag is set to on (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning hole 833 is open. If the V winning opening/closing part operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2810, and if the V winning opening opening/closing part operating flag is set to OFF. (Step S2809: No), the process moves to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V winning opening opening/closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time measured at which time measurement is started in step S2808 corresponds to a first predetermined time. (Step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening/closing part 835 to the standby position and closing the V winning opening 833. If the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2813, and if it determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the process moves to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811). Whether or not a game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 is determined, for example, by whether or not a game ball has been detected by a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning hole 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: Yes), it sets the type 2 jackpot flag to ON (step S2812), and ends the wing accessory device control process. Here, the type 2 jackpot flag indicates whether to execute a jackpot game based on the winning of a game ball to the V winning hole 833, and the jackpot game state is changed in step S3005 in the game state transition process of FIG. 49, which will be described later. This is referred to by the MPU 41 in order to determine whether or not to shift to. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won in the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: No), the MPU 41 ends the wing accessory device control process without setting the type 2 jackpot flag to ON.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it determines that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 moves the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 to the standby position. (Step S2813), and sets the V-winning port opening/closing part operation flag to OFF (Step S2814), and ends the wing accessory device control process.

<Step S2815>
If the V winning opening/closing part operating flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing part operating flag, which is set to ON in step S2805, is set to ON. A judgment is made (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning hole 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is open. If the movable wing section operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2816, and if the movable wing section operating flag is set to OFF (step S2815: No), the wing accessory device control process ends.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable wing section operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), and whether or not the clocking time at which timing is started in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time. (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to return the movable blade portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. If the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2817, and if it determines that the clocked time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83, the wing accessory device control process is ended.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
If the clocked time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing section 832 to the standby position, closes the inlet 831 (step S2817), and sets the movable wing section operating flag. is set to off (step S2818). This ends the second type game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is a small win. Further, the MPU 41 finishes counting the operating time of the wing accessory device 83 that was started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the wing accessory device operation end flag to ON (step S2820), and The device control process ends. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has ended, that is, the 2nd type game has ended, and the 2nd type game is completed in step S3003 of the game state transition process in FIG. 49, which will be described later. After the game ends, it is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether to transition to the jackpot game state.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, the special pattern fluctuation start process is different from the special pattern fluctuation start process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 22). Has a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special symbol fluctuation start process of this embodiment differs from the special symbol fluctuation start process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 22) in the processing up to setting the lottery result flag. (Steps S2901 to S2908). In addition, in this embodiment, as a lottery result other than a big hit in the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game, there is a small win in addition to a miss, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the above-mentioned first Steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) regarding the loss in the special figure fluctuation start process of the embodiment take into consideration the case of a small hit (steps S2909 and S2910). Steps S2901 to S2910 will be explained below.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure variation start process of this embodiment, first, when starting the variation of special figures, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game scheduled to start is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines to start the first special drawing game (step S2901: Yes), it makes a judgment based on the first special drawing jackpot correctness table (see FIG. 45(A)) (step S2902), and executes the process. The process moves to step S2904. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines not to start the first special figure game (step S2901: No), that is, if it determines to start the second special figure game, the MPU 41 selects the second special figure jackpot propriety table (FIG. 45(A)). (see step S2903), and the process moves to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2905, and if the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small win or a loss, The process moves to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 sorts the jackpot type based on the special drawing jackpot table (see FIG. 45(B)) (step S2905), and moves the process to step S2908. . Specifically, the MPU 41 allocates the jackpot type to either the 4R time-saving jackpot or the 8R time-saving jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
If the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is a small win or not (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small win (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory device activation flag to ON (step S2907), and moves the process to step S2908. The wing accessory device activation flag is a flag for activating the wing accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. It is referenced by the MPU 41 for this purpose. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small win (step S2906: No), that is, if the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2908 without setting the wing accessory device activation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes the process according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), it sets the lottery result flag to ON. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot, and sets the small win flag to ON when it is a small win. , if it is an outlier, set the outlier flag to on.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 executes predetermined processing (steps S1807 to S1811) similarly to the first embodiment described above, and then sets the losing flag to be set to ON in step S2908. Alternatively, it is determined whether the small hit flag is set on (step S2809). If the losing flag or the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the losing flag or the small winning flag to OFF (step S2810), and moves the process to step S1815. On the other hand, if the loss flag or the small hit flag is set to OFF (step S2909: No), the process moves to step S1818. Hereinafter, steps S1815 to S1818 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and the special symbol variation start process is ended.

[Game state transition processing]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability changing machine, in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above, when the special figure game ends (when the first type game ends ), it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode ends, and after the time-saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1st type and 2nd type mixing machine, not only when the special figure game ends (when the 1st type game ends), but also when the wing accessory device is activated. The above-mentioned first method also determines whether or not the time-saving mode ends at the end (at the end of the second type game), and shifts to mode A after the end of the time-saving mode (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). This is different from the gaming state transition process of the embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot (type 1 jackpot) of the special figure game is used as an opportunity to shift to the jackpot game state, but in this embodiment, not only the type 1 jackpot but also the feather accessory device This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the state shifts to the jackpot game state by the type 2 jackpot based on the winning of the game ball into the V winning hole 833 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the mode transition destination was determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 13(A) and steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 23), but in this embodiment, one type This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a type 2 jackpot (FIG. 45(E), steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Steps S3001 to S3012 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern fluctuation stop flag to OFF when the special pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), It is determined whether the type 1 jackpot flag set to on in step S2908 of the figure fluctuation start process is set to on (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing to shift to the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the wing accessory device operation flag set to on in step S2907 of the special figure variation start process in FIG. 48 is set to on. The feather accessory device activation flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is to be operated. If the wing accessory device activation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the gaming state because it is necessary to operate the wing accessory device 83. The game state transition process ends. On the other hand, if the wing accessory device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes processing to determine whether to shift to mode A, mode C', or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, Steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1900: No), the MPU 41 turns on the wing accessory device operation end flag that is set to on in step S2820 of the wing accessory device control process in FIG. is set (step S3003). The wing accessory device operation end flag indicates that it is the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83, that is, it is the timing to return the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. If the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to OFF (step S3004), and moves the process to step S3005. On the other hand, if the wing accessory device operation end flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process moves to step S1914 in FIG. 50.

<Step S3005>
If it is the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag set to ON in step S2812 of the wing accessory device control process in FIG. It is determined whether it is set to on (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state after the operation of the wing accessory device 83 is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the 2nd type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the jackpot game state in the same way as when the 1st type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes). Processing is executed to shift to (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the second type jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 operates in the same manner as when the feather accessory device activation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No). , executes processing to determine whether to shift to mode A, mode C', or mode E' (steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, and S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag that is set to on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17 is set to on. When the process is executed (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether the type 1 jackpot flag that is set to on in step S2908 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 48 is set to on. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is either mode C' or mode E' of the special figure game states. If the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007. On the other hand, if the type 1 jackpot flag is not set on (step S3002: No), that is, if the type 2 jackpot flag is set on, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C' of the special figure gaming state (step S3007), and further sets the mode C' flag to ON. (Step S3008). That is, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 is in the time saving mode and high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game, and the MPU 41 alternately operates the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. The mode is shifted to mode C' in which game balls can enter the ball. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3009), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E' of the special figure gaming state ( Step S3010), and further sets the mode E' flag to ON (step S3011). That is, in the case of a type 2 jackpot due to the winning of a game ball to the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83, the MPU 41 is in the time saving mode and high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball is shifted to a mode E' in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3012), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In addition, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the end of the jackpot game and the mode C' flag is set on (steps S3007 and S3008), and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E' after the end of the jackpot game. mode and the mode E' flag is set to on (steps S3010 and S3011), so when the time saving mode ends and the mode A is shifted to mode A (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), the mode E' flag is set to on in step S3008. The mode C' flag that is set to , or the mode E' flag that is set to on in step S3010 is set to off.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes from mode A to mode C', from mode C' to any one of mode A, mode C' and mode E', and from mode E' to mode C' in the special figure gaming state. Transition to either mode A or mode E'. In other words, after the first hit in mode A, how to continue the time saving mode by winning a type 1 jackpot or a type 2 jackpot in mode 'C' and mode E', which are time saving modes, before falling to mode A due to the end of time saving. Has game nature. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 which is a one-type and two-type mixing machine but has gaming characteristics similar to an ST machine. In addition, in mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed alternately by left-handed batters, while in mode E', the second special figure game is basically executed by right-handed batters. In addition, compared to the probability of a type 1 jackpot in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the expectation of a type 2 jackpot due to the operation of the feather accessory device due to a small win in the second special figure game is higher. is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', there is a lower possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time-saving mode than in mode C', and as a result, the expectation of a jackpot is advantageous to the player. Since Mode C' and Mode E' have two types of modes with different expectations for continuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Seventh to Twelfth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game balls are alternately distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38, which is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by the game balls. The gaming machine 10 including the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the seventh to twelfth embodiments differ from the first embodiment in the configuration of the distribution section of the distribution device. The seventh to twelfth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54.

<Seventh embodiment>
The sorting device of this embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a sorting section that rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise, but the sorting section is a solenoid or the like. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by a driving means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), the sorting device 35A of this embodiment includes a sorting member 38A (distributing portion) rotatably fixed directly below the inlet 350. . This distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape and is rotated by a driving means (not shown) between a right tilted position shown in FIG. 51(A) and a left tilted position shown in FIG. 51(B). dynamically driven. When the distribution member 38A is located in the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51(A), the game balls 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 are guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is located at the left tilted position shown in FIG. be guided. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 when it receives support from the electric support member 36, and enters the right first starting port 314R when it does not receive support from the electric support member 36. In addition, in the sorting device 35A of this embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being hit so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, the sorting device 35A is made opaque, for example. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Further, the distributing member 38A may be driven by a driving means so as to rotate alternately between a left tilted position and a right tilted position, for example, at regular intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distributing member 38A does not necessarily need to be rotated at a constant period, but may be driven to perform patterned irregular rotation operations, and may be rotated in a plurality of different rotation patterns for a fixed period or an indefinite period. It is also possible to change the operation time by time. For example, the rotation pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at regular or irregular intervals. Rotation patterns in which the ball easily enters the first passage 351 include a pattern in which the time for the distribution member 38A to stop at the right tilt position is longer than the time for the distribution member 38A to stop at the left tilt position; A pattern may be considered in which the speed (time) of rotating to the tilted position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of rotating from the left tilted position to the right tilted position. When using a plurality of rotation patterns in combination, the distribution member 38A is rotated so that the game balls 99 are finally distributed into the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 at a theoretical ratio of 1:1. is preferred. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, it may be configured such that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, if the distribution member 38A is at the left tilted position, the ball is distributed. While the member 38A is rotated to the right tilted position, it is also possible to rotate the distribution member 38A to the left tilted position when the distribution member 38A is in the right tilted position.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the driving means, the ratio at which the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily changed. can be biased accidentally or intentionally. This determines whether the game ball 99 is guided to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C. Since the player can enjoy the game while deciding whether or not he or she will win at the second start opening 315, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution part is rotated between the right tilt position and the left tilt position by a driving means such as a solenoid, as in the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. This differs from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is different from the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment described above in the shape of the distribution section.

As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), the sorting device 35B of this embodiment includes a sorting member 38B (distributing portion) rotatably fixed directly below the inlet 350. . This distribution member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or anchor shape having a circular arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right inclined position shown in FIG. 52(A) and a left inclined position shown in FIG. 52(B). It is rotationally driven between the two positions by a driving means (not shown). Note that the distribution member 38B of this embodiment differs only in shape from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above, and is otherwise similar to the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above. The game machine 10 has the same functions and effects as the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. Moreover, the distribution member 38B of this embodiment can be changed in design in the same way as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the shape of the distribution part that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means is different from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and various design changes are possible. For example, the shape may be the same as or similar to the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment may have a flat plate portion or a bent portion in place of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<9th and 10th embodiment>
The sorting device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments, as a sorting section, moves the game balls 99 into the first passage 351 by rotating clockwise or counterclockwise when the game balls 99 interfere with each other. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it includes a rotating body that distributes the rotation to either the second passage 352 or the second passage 352 .

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting section of the sorting device 35C has a cylindrical shape that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 38C (rotating body) and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting section of the sorting device 35D has a windmill that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. 38D, and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350. In the windmill 38D, a rotating body 382D is fixed to be freely rotatable by a nail 381D (fixing part). The end of the nail 381D is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 381D is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the wind turbine 38D is capable of plastic change, when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial setting position, and furthermore, the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial setting position, the nail 381D is moved to the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, the rotating bodies such as the roller 38C and the windmill 38D, which freely rotate in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction, are distributed by the interference of the game ball 99. Since the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, the ratio can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is Since you can enjoy the game while having to decide which of the two passages 352 it will be guided to, that is, whether the game ball 99 will receive the support of the electric support member 36 and enter the second starting port 315, you can enjoy the game. It can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the sorting section is a rotating body such as the roller 38C or the windmill 38D, the player can check the tendency of the sorting between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individuals between the gaming machines) by the rotating body as the sorting section. It is also possible to read the difference). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

Note that the configuration of the rotating body as the distribution section is not limited to the cylindrical roller 38C shown in FIG. 53(A) or the windmill 38D shown in FIG. 53(B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body includes a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a quadrangular prism, a member with a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylinder member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a rotating body having a plurality of wings. It may also be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Further, the rotating bodies such as the cylindrical roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable in clockwise and counterclockwise directions by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating bodies. In this case, the rotational drive of the rotating body may be alternately switched between a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction at fixed time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily need to switch the rotational direction at regular intervals, and may switch the rotational direction at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game balls 99 are distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be changed so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, the rotating body can be configured to be driven so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, the rotating body is rotated in the opposite direction to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<Eleventh and twelfth embodiments>
The sorting devices of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments move the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by an immovable and non-rotatable sorting part (fixed sorting part) without rotation or rotation. This differs from the first embodiment described above in that the information is distributed to one of the following.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), the sorting device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has an apex 389E directly below the introduction port 350, and distributes as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixing part 38E. A section is formed. In this mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E, the game balls 99 that have interfered with the top portion 389E or the vicinity thereof are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the sorting device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the apex nail 389F (fixed part) is located directly below the introduction port 350, and the apex nail 389F (fixed part) is arranged in a symmetrical triangular shape. A distribution section is formed by the nails 38F. In this triangular nail 38F, since the game ball 99 that interfered with the apex nail 389F is distributed to the left and right, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Each of the triangular nails 38F has an end driven into the game board 31, with the end being a fixed end and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Moreover, the triangular nail 38F is formed of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F can be plastically changed, it becomes possible to return the triangular nail 38F to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 38F deviates from the initial setting position. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 38F.

Furthermore, in the game machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the distribution part is a fixed distribution part that is immovable and non-rotatable, such as the mountain-shaped fixed part 38E or the triangular nail 38F, so that the game ball 99 is The ratio of distribution to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is Since you can enjoy the game while having to decide which of the two passages 352 it will be guided to, that is, whether the game ball 99 will receive the support of the electric support member 36 and enter the second starting port 315, you can enjoy the game. It can improve your interest. In addition, if the distribution part is a fixed distribution part that is immovable and non-rotatable, such as a mountain-shaped fixed part 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the player can sort the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution part. It is also possible to read the trends (individual differences between gaming machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

The configuration of the distribution section that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing part 38E shown in FIG. 54(A) and the triangular nail 38F shown in FIG. 54(B). However, the design can be changed. For example, the distribution part may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-like peak, or it may have four or more square nails (diamond-shaped nails) with the apex nail located directly below the inlet 350. It may be made of nails or one nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[13th to 29th embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory has a plurality of delay guides 364 extending from the wall portion 361 in an inclined shape with the distal end located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end. By providing a plurality of delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, it was possible to ensure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured for a long time by a different configuration from the first embodiment described above. The thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

<13th to 15th embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, the delay part of the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, extends from the wall part 361 in a staggered manner, and the tip part is located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end part. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 and moving the game balls 99 along a meandering path in the electric support member 36, the residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 13th to 15th embodiments, the electric support member is configured to move the game ball 99 along a meandering path by the delay section, as in the first embodiment. However, the configuration of the delay section is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

The thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(A) to 55(C). Here, FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of the electric supporting member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The plan view, FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as a delay part is an equilateral triangle in plan view, and the right side ( The sloped sides are located on the upstream side) and are arranged in a staggered manner throughout. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as a delay portion is semicircular in plan view, They are arranged in a staggered manner throughout. In the plurality of delay guides 364A, 364B shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), the game ball 99 interferes with each delay guide 364A, 364B in the electric support members 36A, 36B, so that the game ball 99 It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

Note that the plurality of delay guides serving as the delay portion are not limited to those having an equilateral triangular or semicircular shape in plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as they have a shape that allows the game ball 99 to meander. For example, the plurality of delay guides may each be formed into a rectangular shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, or a parallelogram, and arranged in a staggered manner so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side). is formed into a shape with a parabolic or arc-shaped outer periphery such as a quarter circle, half ellipse, or quarter ellipse, and is staggered so that the parabolic or arc-shaped outer periphery is located on the right side (upstream side). It may also be something that has been placed.

As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. Also due to such meandering groove 364C, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in the electric support member 36C while meandering. In addition, the shape of the meandering groove 364C as a delay part is variously possible as long as it is a groove shape that can make the game ball 99 meander.

In this way, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the game balls 99 are made to meander in the electric support members 36A to 36C, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), the residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C can be ensured for a long time. As a result, in the 13th to 15th embodiments, as well as in the first embodiment described above, when the player hits right when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the electric It becomes difficult to receive support from the support members 36A to 36C. Therefore, if the player plays right-handed in a situation where left-handed batting is encouraged, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining an abnormal profit that exceeds the expected profit.

<16th to 29th embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 includes a plurality of inclined portions extending in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361 and having the distal end portion located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the proximal end portion. By providing the delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 in a meandering path in the electric support member 36, the moving distance of the game ball in the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is increased. was secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as a delay part of the electric support member, while the game ball is moved linearly in the electric support member, the retention time of the game ball in the electric support member is This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is configured so that it can be secured for a long time.

Hereinafter, the 16th to 29th embodiments will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63. Since the electric support members of these embodiments can also ensure a long residence time of game balls, the above-mentioned The same effects as the first embodiment are achieved. In other words, when the special figure game state is Mode B or Mode C, if the player hits the right hand, it will be difficult for the player to receive support from the electric support member. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit from being obtained in the gaming machine 10 when a player makes a bet.

(16th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56(B) is a sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line in FIG. 56(A). be.

As shown in FIGS. 56(A) and 56(B), in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364D extending in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. It is being The plurality of linear convex portions 364D extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear convex portion 364D has a horizontal surface 365D and a vertical surface 366D, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36D of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on this horizontal surface 365D by providing the horizontal surface 365D.

Note that the horizontal surface 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball, a rough surface with large movement resistance is preferable. Here, the rough surface includes a matte surface due to grains, a surface having unevenness due to embossing, etc. Furthermore, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging an elastic member on the horizontal surface or by forming the horizontal surface from an elastic material.

Instead of the horizontal surface 365D, the linear convex portion 364D may be provided with a slightly inclined surface whose left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side). In this case, if the inclination angle of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the inclination angle of the electric support member 36D with respect to the horizontal, the delay function will be achieved. preferable. Moreover, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of linear convex portions as delay portions, and one linear convex portion may be provided.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57(A) is a sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 57C is a sectional view showing the main part of the support member 36F. FIG. 57C is a sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments are different from the electric support members of the sixteenth embodiment in that a plurality of linear convex portions 364E to 364G having horizontal surfaces 365E to 365G are provided. Same as 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the linear convex portion 364E of the seventeenth embodiment has an inclined surface 366E instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 57(B), the linear convex portion 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal surface 365F, but an arcuate surface 366F is provided in place of the vertical surface 366D of the aforementioned sixteenth embodiment. This embodiment is different from the above-described sixteenth embodiment in that this embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above. Note that the surface that can replace the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E or the arcuate surface 366F, but may be a surface of another shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and horizontal surfaces 365G and vertical surfaces 366G are alternately continuous. This is different from the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Of course, in the eighteenth embodiment as well, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arcuate surface may be used instead of the vertical surface 366G.

Note that the linear convex portions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments can also be modified in the same manner as in the sixteenth embodiment described above.

(Twentieth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member 36H of a gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58(B) is a sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line in FIG. 58(A). .

The electric support member 36H of the 20th embodiment shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B) differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 56(B), in the 20th embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H that extend in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36H of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on this horizontal surface 365H by providing the horizontal surface 365H. Note that the linear recess 364H may employ surfaces of other shapes in place of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H, as in the aforementioned sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments. Moreover, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of linear recesses as the delay portion, and one linear recess may be provided.

(21st to 26th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of the electric supporting member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. A perspective view, FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. 60(B) is an electric supporting member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the support member 36L, FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing the main parts of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 61(B) is the main part of the electric support member 36M of the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the principal part of electric support member 36N of gaming machine 10 concerning this embodiment.

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 have the above-mentioned point that the delay portions are provided as a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions 364I to 364N. This is different from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in the twenty-first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of convex portions 364I, and these convex portions 364I are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I and a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A)). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the 22nd embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364J having a shape similar to that of the above-mentioned 21st embodiment are arranged in an orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, etc.). arranged in an isosceles grid).

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in the twenty-third embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in the shape of a square prism, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364K may be formed in a polygonal prism shape other than a rectangular prism shape such as a triangular prism shape or a pentagonal prism shape, or a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). May be placed.

As shown in FIG. 60(B), in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364L are formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and these convex portions 364L are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape. The plurality of convex portions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape other than a triangular pyramid shape, a pentagonal pyramid shape, etc. May be placed.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364M are formed in a columnar shape, and these convex portions 364M are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern.

The plurality of convex portions 364M of the twenty-fifth embodiment and the plurality of convex portions 364N of the twenty-sixth embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice shape (a rhombic lattice shape, a triangular lattice shape, an isosceles lattice shape). Further, instead of the plurality of convex portions 364M and the plurality of convex portions 364N, a plurality of convex portions having other shapes having circular bottoms, such as a conical shape or a truncated conical shape, may be discretely arranged.

Note that the plurality of protrusions serving as delay parts do not all have to have the same shape, and may be arranged in combination with a plurality of protrusions with different shapes, or in combination with linear protrusions or linear concave parts. May be placed. Further, the plurality of convex portions serving as the delay portions do not necessarily need to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or in a random arrangement without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of the electric supporting member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG.

The electric support members 36O, 36P of the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B) are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O, 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), in the electric support member 36O of the twenty-seventh embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each recess 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O that is the same as the cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (cut A1-A1 in FIG. 56(A)). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 62(B), in the electric support member 36P of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recesses 364O of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are provided as delay portions. They are arranged in a square lattice (diamond lattice, triangular lattice, isosceles lattice).

Note that the shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be changed in various ways, such as a polygonal columnar shape such as a quadrangular columnar shape, a polygonal pyramidal shape such as a quadrangular pyramidal shape, a cylindrical shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a truncated conical shape, etc. The bottom surface may be circular.

In addition, the plurality of recesses serving as delay parts do not all have to have the same shape, and may be arranged in combination of a plurality of recesses of different shapes, such as a linear convexity, a linear concavity, and a plurality of convexities. It may be placed in combination with Further, the plurality of recesses serving as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or in a random arrangement with no regularity.

(29th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 63(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 63(A). be.

The electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B) differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the delay portion is provided as a plurality of rotationally driven rollers 364Q. It is different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), the electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as a delay section. However, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q is sufficient. Each roller 364Q is arranged such that its rotation axis runs along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (direction that intersects the moving direction of the game ball 99), and is rotatably supported. Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction, which is a direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball, by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is subjected to a load toward the right side (upstream side) by interfering with the plurality of rollers 364Q. As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, thereby ensuring a long residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q.

Note that the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball, a rough surface with a large movement resistance is preferable. Here, the rough surface includes a matte surface due to grains, a surface having unevenness due to embossing, etc. Further, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be formed of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay section is configured as a roller, it may be configured to apply magnetic force or electromagnetic force to the game ball 99 via the roller. Thereby, the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced by attracting the game ball 99 to the roller. In this case, the roller may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, but it may also be configured to be able to rotate freely without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Furthermore, like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments described above, the roller 364Q includes linear convex portions 364D to 364G, a linear concave portion 364H, and a plurality of convex portions arranged in a grid pattern. It is also conceivable to use it in addition to a configuration in which 364I to 364N or recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Thirtieth to Thirty-Eighth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is connected to the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314L. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving part 391, which is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the first starting port 314R and the first starting port 314R, has been described. On the other hand, the 30th to 38th embodiments are different from the first embodiment in that each of the first starting port and the second starting port is provided. The 30th to 38th embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape. Further, since the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the first embodiment described above.

The 30th embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. Here, FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 64(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the electric support member 36R. A perspective view, FIG. 65(A) is a diagram when the electric support member 36R is in a standby state in FIG. 64(A), FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line in FIG. 65(A), FIG. 66(A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view taken along the line A4-A4 in FIG. 66(A).

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , a right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the introduction port 350 of the ball. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is located on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 (below the second starting port 315). A standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315. It is possible to move back and forth on the game board 31 between the two.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided at the center of a certain ball receiving part 391. That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 are Any of the distributed game balls 99 can be won in the same first starting hole 314. In addition, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, which will be described later, so that the game balls 99 released from the second passage 352 are The ball does not enter the second starting port 315 directly.

As shown in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted shape having a left guiding portion 361R (first portion) and a right guiding portion 362R (second portion). . The left guide portion 361R is located below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends continuously between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . Therefore, the right guide portion 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315. Further, it is preferable to provide the right guide section 362R with a delay section as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in a gaming state where the electric support member 36R is operated for a short time, if a player hits the ball in a hitting manner (right-handed hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed hitting), a game ball enters the second starting port 315. It becomes difficult to be treated. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is possible to encourage the player to actively play left-handed hitting.

A penetrating portion 363R is provided between the left guiding portion 361R and the right guiding portion 362R so as to be located above the second starting port 315. This penetrating portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guiding part 361R can pass through the penetrating part 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guiding part 362R can pass through the penetrating part 363R. The ball can pass through and enter the second starting port 315. Further, the electric support member 36R is arranged in the front-rear direction between a standby position that restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. It is possible to move to Movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Further, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions, operation pattern, etc. are the same as those of the first embodiment. Specifically, in Modes A to Mode C, if the lottery result in the regular lottery is a win, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315 for a short time. In mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is driven for a long time so that it can enter the second starting port 315 when the lottery result in the lottery with a common figure is a win. . In addition, the electric support member 36R is activated on the condition that the first through gate 318 detects the passing of a game ball in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 without performing a general lottery. You can.

As shown in FIGS. 65(A) and 65(B), when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31 and is entirely inside the game board 31. Located in Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the first starting port 314 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the left guide portion 361R. Furthermore, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 and exits from the out port 317 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guide portion 362R. It is discharged. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314 when it is in the standby position, while allowing the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314. 2. Entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 is restricted.

As shown in FIGS. 66(A) and 66(B), when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is guided toward the penetration part 363R by the left guiding part 361R, and the electric support member 36R is activated until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration part 363R. When the ball is in the position, the ball passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetration part 363R by the right guide part 362R, and when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration part 363R. , the ball passes through the penetration portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36R allows the restriction of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314 when in the operating position, while allowing the restriction of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314. The game ball 99 is allowed to enter the starting port 315. In addition, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 are placed in the second The ball is allowed to enter the starting port 315.

Further, in this embodiment as well, similar to the first embodiment described above, evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35. The retreat guide nails 393, 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35. That is, the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, so that when the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located on the right side of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when it receives the support of the electric support member 36R by actuating the electric support member 36R, and If the ball cannot receive support, the ball enters the first starting port 314. Therefore, in this embodiment, a state in which the game ball enters the first starting port 314 through the first passage 351, a state in which the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314 through the second path 352, Three states can be taken, including a state where the game ball enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Further, whether the game ball 99 sorted to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36R is activated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R, but also game balls that are sorted into the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 315 of 99 differs, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional gaming machines, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the electric support member 36R of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, not only controls whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls 99 into the second starting port 315, but also controls the Whether or not there is a restriction on entry of game balls 99 passing through the second passage 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched at the same time. Therefore, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R cooperate, so that the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 It is possible to change the ball entry ratio. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of ball entry ratio, and create new games by controlling the operation of the electric support member 36R. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly entertaining and has a unique character.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, like the electric support member 36, the game ball when hitting right-handed passes above the first starting port 314R and enters the second starting port 315. In this case, if the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first starting port 314R, there is a possibility that the game ball when hitting right may enter the first starting port 314. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the game ball when hitting right is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding part 362R of the electric support member 36R, the game ball when hitting right is guided to the first starting port 315. It never passes above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 314 when hitting right-handed.

Note that the penetrating portion of the electric support member 36R is not limited to a notch shape that opens forward, but may be a through hole that opens only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<31st embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. Further, since the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the first embodiment described above.

The 31st embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B). Here, FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B) are diagrams showing main parts of the gaming board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 67(A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67(B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is opened.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , a right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the introduction port 350 of the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is used for introducing the sorting device 35. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in an area directly below the mouth 350. That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 Any of the game balls 99 that are distributed can win a prize in the same first starting hole 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and includes a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31, a rotatable left and right wing member 3681S, 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. This upper opening 369S is a part for introducing the game ball 99 into the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similar to the upper opening 369S.

Furthermore, a triangular nail 31S made up of three nails is provided above the upper opening 369S. This triangular nail 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the interior of the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67(A)). Note that instead of the triangular nail 31S, the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by one nail, or the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by something other than the nail. In addition, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 is transferred to the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed. If entering the ball can be restricted, the triangular nail 31S may be omitted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a path nail 31M' (guiding part) made up of a plurality of nails is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. The path nail 31M' is provided so as to be inclined downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side area towards the electric tulip accessories device 36S. Therefore, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S (described later) are opened (see FIG. 67(B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the path nail 31M' and passes through the upper opening 369S to the electric tulip accessory. The game ball 99 is introduced into the device 36S and enters the second starting port 315. On the other hand, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67(A)), the game ball 99 guided to the dowel 31M' enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. is restricted, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the dowel 31M', and is discharged from the outlet 317. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S are rotatable by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the drive means causes the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S to close when closed. state (see FIG. 67(A)) and an open state (see FIG. 67(B)) in which the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are separated. Note that the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) is caused by the opening of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of this embodiment. Correspondingly, returning the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to closing the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of this embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(A), the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. I can't play the ball. That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is prevented from entering the second starting port 315 by the left wing member 3681S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is bounced to the left side and falls into the ball receiving part 391, and is guided to the first starting port 314 by the ball receiving part 391. Win 314. In addition, the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M' collides with the side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and The ball cannot enter the inside of the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M' as described above, and is ejected from the outlet 317. .

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, the prize is won in the second starting port 315. In addition, the game ball 99 that flows down the right side area of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the path nail 31M' bridges between the second starting port 315 and the path nail 31M'. The ball is picked up by the right wing member 3682S, enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and enters the second starting port 315 to win a prize. That is, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are in the closed state, the electric tulip accessory device 36S launches the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right side area of the game board 31. Any of the game balls 99 are allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, not only controls whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls 99 into the second starting port 315, but also controls the distribution of game balls 99. At the same time, whether or not there is a restriction on entry of game balls 99 released from the second passage 352 of the device 35 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sorting device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other. The ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 can be changed. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), the monotony of the game is reduced based on the three game states with different expected values of ball entry ratio, and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) It is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that has new gameplay depending on the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as the electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged in which the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31 (for example, mode A or mode C), the right side area of the game board 31 is In order to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the game ball is hit right-handed, a delay portion (delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) is used. ) is not necessary, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be used. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the advantage that it is easier to design than the first embodiment described above. In addition, in this embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, one first starting port and one ball entry sensor can be omitted compared to the first embodiment described above. This embodiment is easier to design than the first embodiment, and is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

<Thirty-second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a general prize opening with a different function from the first starting opening is provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device. .

The 32nd embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(A). Here, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is only one first starting port 314; The second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the first embodiment. Note that the second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is a region directly below the introduction port 350, similarly to the first embodiment described above. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is connected in series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the lower side of the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It extends and is movable in the longitudinal direction of the game board 31 between a standby position and an operating position. Furthermore, below the second passage 352, a general winning a prize opening 313', which has a different function from the first starting opening 314 and the second starting opening 315, is provided instead of the first starting opening. In other words, the electric support member 36 has the general winning opening 313' open in the standby position, and the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36 restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 when the general winning hole 313' is open in the standby position, while in the operating position the general winning hole 313' is closed. Then, the ball is guided to the second starting port 315 and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball enters the starting port 314. On the other hand, when the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 receives support from the electric support member 36 by actuating the electric support member 36, the ball enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315. If the player is unable to receive support from the player, the ball will be entered into the general winning slot 313'.

Here, the distribution device of the conventional gaming machine distributes the game balls to the first starting section and the second starting section, which has the disadvantage that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the second passage There are three states: a state in which the game ball No. 352 enters the general prize winning port 313', and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. It can take two states. Further, whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are entered into the general prize opening 313' or the second starting opening 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate to have a plurality of states, but also the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning hole 313', thereby providing the gaming machine 10 with novel gaming properties that cannot be realized with conventional gaming machines. Ru. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the first starting port 314 and The ball enters the general winning hole 313' without entering any of the second starting holes 315. On the other hand, in mode C as a latent probability change, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. do. That is, in mode A, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314), and half enter the general prize winning port 313'. In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting hole (half of them are the first starting hole 314 and half are the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A is executed, but also the number of special figures that are twice as many as in mode A, based on the number of game balls entering the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability variation), the chances of receiving a jackpot lottery are doubled compared to mode A. In this way, the present embodiment provides a new gaming machine 10 that could not be realized with conventional gaming machines.

Furthermore, if the number of prize balls is different between the first starting hole 314 and the general prize winning hole 313', the increase and decrease of game balls in the special figure game can be made different from that in the first embodiment described above. You can also do it. For example, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning hole 313' larger than the number of prize balls for the first starting hole 314, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of game balls decreases slowly in the special figure game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning hole 313' smaller than the number of prize balls for the first starting hole 314, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of game balls decreases sharply in the special figure game. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, the game machine 10 can have a rapid increase and decrease in game balls.

<33rd embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Moreover, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, the case where the general prize opening 313' is provided directly under the second passage 352 has been described. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment in that neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device. It is different from the form. Note that, in this embodiment, the second starting port is not provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device.

The thirty-third embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(B). Here, FIG. 68(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that there is only one first starting port 314; This embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351, and is also common to the thirty-second embodiment. Further, the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36 in this embodiment are also common to the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above. On the other hand, in this embodiment, neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, there are no winning openings such as a second starting opening or a through gate, which have different functions from the first starting opening and the general winning opening. In this embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315, as described above. This is common to the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment, but when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 fall along the game board 31, and the various winning slots This differs from the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above in that the winnings are ejected from the out port 317 without winning.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball enters the mouth 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the electric support member 36 being activated. If it is not possible to receive support, it is discharged from the outlet 317. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the first passage 352. There are three possible states: a state in which the ball is discharged from the out port 317, and a state in which the game ball in the second path 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second path 352 and the electric support member 36. Further, whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are ejected from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and frequency of operation depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states due to the cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game that is sorted to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the game becomes more interesting.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 are not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, thereby providing a new gaming experience that cannot be achieved with conventional gaming machines. A gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are ejected from the out port 317. Ru. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability variation, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. be done. That is, in mode A, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314), and half are ejected from the out port 317, while in mode C, All the game balls 99 are entered into the starting hole (half of them are the first starting hole 314 and half of them are the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A is executed, but also the number of special figures that are twice as many as in mode A, based on the number of game balls entering the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability variation), the chance of receiving a jackpot lottery is doubled compared to mode A. In this way, the present embodiment provides a new gaming machine 10 that could not be realized with conventional gaming machines.

In this embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the second passage 352 are discharged from the outlet 317 when there is no support from the electric support member 36, but the game balls that have passed through the second passage 352 are discharged from the second passage 352 below the sorting device 35. A winning hole may be provided at a remote location so that the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 can enter the winning hole.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is slid along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fourth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Here, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T in standby state of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 69(B) is a diagram 69(A), FIG. 70(A) is a diagram showing the essential part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. ) is a perspective view showing the main part of.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is located between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R, and is located directly under the inlet 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided at the center of the receiving part 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36T is provided on the left side of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate shape inclined slightly downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T has a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M'. It is possible to move between That is, the electric support member 36T is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

As shown in FIGS. 69(A) and 69(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, that is, the electric support member 36T is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and at the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36T and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

As shown in FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support The member 36T opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also allows the game ball 99 to move into the second starting port 315 by moving the path nail 31M' to the left. A bridge is provided between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36T. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, a plurality of guard nails 31B (two in this embodiment) as a guard portion are arranged on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game balls 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting opening 315 from jumping over the second starting opening 315 when the electric supporting member 36T is in the operating position. be. That is, when the moving speed is high, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 collides with the plurality of guard nails 31B without directly entering the second starting port 315. After that, the ball enters the second starting port 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be achieved by cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second path 352 and the second Since the ease with which the ball enters the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional gaming machines, and the interest in the game is improved.

<35th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where winning of game balls 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in this embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position, which is different from the first embodiment described above. It is different from the form. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B), the electric support member 36U has a plate shape having a pair of walls 361U that protrude upward from the edge in the width direction, and is inclined slightly downward to the left. It is located. The pair of wall portions 361U function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) end 362 to the left side (downstream side) end 363. The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotating shaft 362U, and by inputting rotational force to the rotating shaft 362U from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U rotates as shown in FIG. 71 in a plan view. (B) Rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated on a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position ( 71(A) and 71(B)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M' (position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B)). It is possible to move between That is, the electric support member 36U is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

When the electric support member 36U is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIGS. When located directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36U and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. The support member 36U opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also allows the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315 by moving the path nail 31M' to the left side. It bridges between the path nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36T. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states due to cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U, but also the second passage 352 and stage 310 Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

Note that the electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 36U to promote movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

<36th embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby providing access to the second starting port 315. The case where winning of game balls 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the electric support member is rotatable in a vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. . Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-sixth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. When in the standby position, FIG. 72(B) shows a case where the electric support member 36V is in an intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72(C) shows a case where the electric support member 36V is in the operating position. .

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, although it is omitted in the drawing, there is only one first starting port 314, similar to the above-mentioned 34th embodiment and 35th embodiment. A starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Also in this embodiment, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316, and the left side of the dowel 31M' and the second starting port 315 are An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable between the upper part and the upper part. The path nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotating shaft 362V, and by inputting rotational force to the rotating shaft 362V from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36V moves along the game board 31. It is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in the vertical plane in FIGS. 72(A) to 72(C). Further, the electric support member 36V is rotated in a vertical plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position ( It is movable between the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(A)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M' (position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position where the second starting port 315 is closed (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(A)) and the second starting port 315 and the path nail 31M'. It is possible to operate between the operating position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72(C)). Note that the electric support member 36V is inclined slightly downward to the left in the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 36V, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. may encourage movement to.

When the electric support member 36V is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the electric support member 36V and the dowel 31M' through which the game ball 99 can pass. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the path peg 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second starting port 315) and the path peg 31M', and passes through the out port 317. is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The opening 315 is opened to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and the opening 31M' and the second starting opening 315 are opened so that the game ball 99 that moves the opening 31M' to the left can enter the second starting opening 315. 2 and the starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving to the left on the path nail 31M' is moved to the left by the electric support member 36V. The ball moves toward the second starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315 . In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dokugi 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, the dokugi 31M' ' and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. The game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side with the dowel 31M' toward the second starting port 315 enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36V depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In this embodiment, the electric support member 36V has two stopping positions: above the second starting port 315 and to the left of the dowel 31M'; The electric support member 36V may be stopped at the position shown in B) where it stands up. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting port 315 and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' are opened simultaneously. Therefore, while the game balls 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game balls 99 flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 and the game balls 99 moving the road nails 31M' Entry of the ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, there is no need to provide an evacuation guiding part such as the evacuation guiding nails 393, 394, and the area to the right of the sorting device 35 is The game ball 99 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<37th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position, and is rotated from above the second starting port 315. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it has a length extending to the left of the path nail 31M'. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-seventh embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Here, FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W in the standby position of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 73(B) is a diagram 73(A) is a perspective view of the main part of the electric support member 36W in FIG. 73(B), FIG. 74(B) is a diagram showing the electric support member 36W in the operating position in FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a modified example of 36W.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided below the variable winning device 316 to the left of the stage 310, and an electric support member 36W is provided to the left of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B), the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate member in plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the dowel 31M', and is arranged so as to be inclined slightly downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36W can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the dokugi 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to guide the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote the movement of

The through hole 363W has a shorter axis larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. Further, the through hole 363W is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port is located when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position It is formed at a location that can be located directly above 315. Note that the shapes of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W are not limited to an ellipse, but may be other shapes such as a circle, an oval, or an oblong rectangle. The closing portion 364W is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotation shaft 362W, and by inputting rotational force from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid to the rotation shaft 362W, the electric support member 36W crosses the game board 31. (on a substantially horizontal plane) in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction of FIG. 73(B). Further, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and while blocking the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, the through hole 363W is rotated at the second starting port 315. and the standby position located between the path nail 31M' (see FIG. 73(B)), and the through hole 363W located directly above the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between an operating position (see FIG. 74(A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M' is closed.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closed part 364W of the electric support member 36W is located above the second starting port 315, and the through hole 363W is located adjacent to the left side of the dowel 31M', The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 by the closing portion 364W, and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position where the game ball 99 can pass between it and the dowel 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left by the dowel 31M' passes through the through hole 363W and is ejected from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 364W is When located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 363W to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also A closing part 364W bridges between the dowel 31M' and the second starting opening 315 so that the game ball 99 moving the 31M' to the left side can enter the second starting opening 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the path nail 31M' to the left side is moved to the second path by the electric support member 36W. The ball moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, in this embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are , the ball enters the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dowel 31M' to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W It passes through, falls between the dowel 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting port 315 open. Therefore, the game balls 99 that are sorted into the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left toward the second starting port 315 with the dokugi 31M' enter the second starting port 315. The ball is thrown. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 and is out. There are three possible states of discharge from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The operating time and frequency of the electric support member 36W depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In addition, the electric support member 36W has a through hole 363W' that is open only upward and downward, as shown in FIG. It may be provided.

<38th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is rotatable around a rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M'. , which is different from the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, one first starting port 314 is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and one second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-eighth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. Here, FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 75(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the electric support member 36X. A perspective view, FIG. 76(A) is a sectional view taken along the A5-A5 section line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view taken along the A6-A6 section line in FIG. 75(B), and FIG. A) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a diagram showing the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member 36X in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided in the area immediately below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Furthermore, a dowel 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided to the left of this dowel 31M'. The guide pin 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. Also in this embodiment, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section instead of the dowel 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75(A), 75(B), 76(A), and 76(B), the electric support member 36X has a first penetrating portion 361X and a second penetrating portion 362X. It has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the dowel 31M', and is arranged in a state where it is inclined slightly downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the dokugi 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to guide the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote the movement of

The first penetrating portion 361X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 361aX and 361bX that face each other, and is open to the left side. The first penetration part 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 by the protruding piece 361aX. (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, it penetrates in the vertical direction, thereby allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315 ( (See FIG. 77(B)).

The second penetrating portion 362X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 362aX and 362bX that face each other, and is open to the right side. Further, the second penetrating portion 362X penetrates in a direction perpendicular to the first penetrating portion 361X. Note that the second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily need to penetrate in a direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 362X, but may just penetrate in a direction that intersects with the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetration part 362X is located in the gap between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M', and penetrates in the vertical direction when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, thereby allowing the second starting The game ball 99 is allowed to pass through the gap between the opening 315 and the path nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the second starting opening is opened by the protruding piece 362aX. 315 and the path nail 31M' to restrict passage of the game ball 99 (see FIG. 77(B)).

The electric support member 36X is rotatable around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first penetration portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction, thereby blocking the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, there is a standby position (see FIG. 77(A)) where the second penetration part 363W penetrates in the vertical direction between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M', and a state where the first penetration part 361X An operating position in which the second passage 362W of the sorting device 35 penetrates in the vertical direction directly under the second passage 352, while the second penetration part 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction and bridges between the second starting port 315 and the dowel 31M'. (See FIG. 77(B)). That is, the electric support member 36X has a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. , and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 is opened and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M' is closed, as shown in FIG. 77(B). .

As shown in FIG. 77(A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and is discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 can pass through the second penetrating portion 362X that penetrates in the vertical direction between the electric support member 36X and the dowel 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the dowel 31M' passes through the second penetration part 362X and is ejected from the out port 317.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(B), when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also The path nail 31M' and the second starting hole 315 are bridged so that the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M' to the left side can enter the second starting hole 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving to the left on the path nail 31M' is moved to the left by the electric support member 36X. The ball moves toward the second starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, also in this embodiment, at the upper left of the second starting port 315, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric supporting member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is placed in the second starting position. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the sorting device 35 in a direction in which they are evacuated from the sorting device 35. Evacuation guiding nails 393, 394 (evacuation guiding portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, the game balls 99 located on the right side of the sorting device 35 can be prevented from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the dowel 31M' to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball moves through the second passage. It passes through the section 362X, falls between the dowel 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first penetration part 361X of the electric support member 36X is between the second starting opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second starting opening 315 open. In order to bridge this, the game balls 99 that are distributed to the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 with the road nail 31M' are moved through the first penetration part 361X. The ball passes through and enters the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed hitting, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball in the second passage 352 game ball enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315 but exits from the out port 317. There are three possible states in which it is ejected. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enter the second starting port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. The amount of time depends on whether or not the electric support member 36X is operated, and the operation time and frequency of operation of the electric support member 36X depend on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, not only can there be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 can be in a plurality of states depending on the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease with which the balls enter the two starting ports 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike in conventional game machines, and the game becomes more interesting.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the electric support member 36X has a through hole 361X that is open only in the upper and lower sides, instead of the first and second through parts 361X and 362X that are partially open laterally as well as the upper and lower sides. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through-hole which is partially open to the sides as well as the top and bottom may be used in combination with a through-hole which is open only to the top and bottom.

Further, in the 30th to 38th embodiments, one first starting port 314 was provided, but similarly to the first embodiment described above, two first starting ports are provided, and one first starting port 314 is provided. The game ball 99 released from the first passage 351 may be allowed to enter through the starting port, and the game ball 99 released from the second path 352 may be allowed to enter using the other first starting port 314L.

In addition, in the 30th to 38th embodiments, the same configuration as the above-described first embodiment can be changed in the same way as in the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the above-mentioned 2nd to 12th embodiments can be changed. It is also possible to adopt configurations of the configurations (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and configurations of modifications thereof. For example, in the 30th to 37th embodiments, the roller 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)) and the windmill 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53(B)) are used as the distribution parts. A rotating body such as, a mountain-shaped fixing part 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54(A)), a triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)), and an apex nail of the triangular nail 38F A fixed distribution part such as a single nail of a chisel can be suitably employed. When such a rotating body or fixed distribution unit is used as the distribution unit, the player can read the tendency of distribution between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution unit (individual differences between gaming machines). It is also possible. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 352. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 352, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 352. It becomes possible to obtain.

[39th to 85th embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, when the sorting device is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 (below the symbol display section), and the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board is introduced into the sorting device. explained. On the other hand, in the game machines according to the 39th to 85th embodiments, the sorting device is provided at the lower right side of the game board 31 (to the right of the symbol display section), and the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board are This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is introduced into a sorting device. Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to the 39th to 85th embodiments, the game balls distributed to the first passage cannot enter the first starting port, whereas the game balls distributed to the first passage are normal. This embodiment also differs from the first embodiment in that the ball can enter the second starting port with the support of an electric accessory. The 39th to 85th embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings. Note that the 40th to 85th embodiments are modifications of the 39th embodiment.

<39th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the sorting device 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 (below the symbol display section 341) so that the game ball for left-handed hitting that is hit to the left side area of the game board can be introduced. A variable prize winning device 316 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 31 (to the right of the symbol display section 341) so that the game ball can be entered when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game board. Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game balls in the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can enter the first starting port 314. Yes, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, both the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. be. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the game ball when hitting left-handed can enter the first moving port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game ball when hitting right-handed can enter the second starting port. It is possible.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variable winning device and the first starting port are provided below the symbol display section, and the game ball when hitting left-handed can enter the variable winning device and the first starting port. . In addition, in this embodiment, the sorting device and the second starting port are provided on the right side of the symbol display section, and the game ball when hitting right is introduced into the sorting device and can enter the second starting port. be. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball when hitting right does not enter the second starting port, a path nail is provided so that the game ball when hitting right can enter the variable winning device. However, in this embodiment, the game ball may be prevented from entering the variable winning device when the game ball is hit to the right by omitting the dowel or by changing the arrangement of the dowel.

Hereinafter, reference will be made to FIGS. 79 to 93 focusing on the distribution device and related parts of the distribution device, which are the differences between the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. This will be explained in detail.

Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including the sorting device and second starting port of the game machine shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. 83 and 84 are diagrams showing the operation of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the opening/closing door of the variable prize winning device of FIG. 80. 86(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 80, FIG. 86(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 80, and FIG. 86(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along a cutting line. 87(A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 86(A), and FIG. 87(B) is a diagram when the electric supporting member is in the operating position in FIG. 86(A). FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of a synchronous lamp.

As shown in FIG. 79, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device 92, a through gate 319', a first starting port 314, a second starting port 315, a variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 93. . Of these, the first starting port 314 and the variable winning device 316 are provided below the symbol display section 341, and the second starting port 315, the sorting device 92, and the electric support member 93 are provided to the right of the symbol display section 341. It is being

Specifically, the first starting opening 314 is provided below the symbol display section 341, and is arranged so as to be able to receive a game ball to be hit to the left in the left side area of the game board 31. The variable winning device 316 is provided below the symbol display section 341 and between the first starting port 314 and the out port 317. In the variable prize winning device 316, by opening the opening/closing door 316a, game balls that have not entered the first starting hole 314 among the game balls when hitting left-handed can enter the variable winning hole 316b. . In addition, when a game ball is launched into the right side area of the game board 31 with the opening/closing door 316a open, the game ball that has not entered the second starting port 315 can enter the variable winning port 316b. The second starting port 315 is provided below the sorting device 92 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922, and can be opened and closed by the electric support member 93. Note that the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 provide an opportunity for a jackpot lottery on the condition that a game ball is inserted.

As shown in FIGS. 86(B) and 87(B), the through gate 319' detects that the game ball 99 has passed through a second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, which will be described later. The through gate 319' includes, for example, a proximity sensor, and detects passage of the game ball 99 by this proximity sensor. When it is detected by the through gate 319' that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922, a lottery for a common symbol is held, and if the result of the lottery for a common symbol is a win, the electric support member 93 is moved to a predetermined position. Time works. Therefore, when the game balls 99 are sorted into the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, the electric support member 93 is activated, and the game balls can enter the second starting port 315. Since the second starting port 315 provides an opportunity for a jackpot lottery on the condition that the game balls 99 are entered, the distribution device 92 distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921. It is more advantageous for the game balls 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922 than when the game balls 99 are distributed to the second passage 922.

In addition, when it is detected by the through gate 319' that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922, the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319' without performing a random lottery. The electric support member 93 may be activated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since this was detected. In this case, it is preferable to set the timing and operating time for operating the electric support member 93 according to the type of special figure game state. For example, in mode A, the electric support member 93 is short-circuited after passing in front of the electric support member 93 so that the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' does not enter the second starting port 315. In addition, in mode B, the electric support member 93 is short-circuited at the timing when the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' is supported by the electric support member 93 and can enter the second starting port 315. Furthermore, in mode E, the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' is supported by the electric support member 93, and is not only launched into the second starting port 315 but also at a constant rate after the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'. The electric support member 93 is operated long so that even if several game balls 99 pass through the first passage 921, they can enter the second starting port 315.

The electric support member 93 is operated by a drive means (independent) such as a solenoid between the standby position shown in FIGS. 86(A) and 86(B) and the operating position shown in FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B). (illustrated) to open and close the second starting port 315. When the electric support member 93 is in the standby position shown in FIGS. 86(A) and 86(B), it restricts the entry of game balls released from the sorting device 92 into the second starting port 315, and 87(A) and 87(B), the game balls released from the sorting device 92 are allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

As shown in FIG. 85, the electric support member 93 includes a base 931, a pair of guard walls 932, and a pair of guides 933. The base 931 has a pair of attachment parts 934 for rotatably attaching the electric support member 93 to the game board 31, and when the electric support member 93 is in the operating position, the base 931 is attached slightly above horizontally from the game board 31. It protrudes (see FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B)). Thereby, when the electric support member 93 is in the operating position, it can receive game balls 99 released from a first passage 921 and a second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, which will be described later. A pair of guard walls 932 extend at the left and right edges of the base 931 and prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 931 from falling from the left and right sides of the base 931. The game ball 99 received by the base 931 is guided to the second starting port 315. The pair of guides 933 extend from the guard wall 932 to the vicinity of the second starting port 315, and form a gap in front of the second starting port 315 through which the game ball 99 can pass.

Here, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is determined by the gaming state as described later, and when the gaming state is mode A and mode B, the short operation is performed (for example, 0.05 seconds), and when the gaming state is mode E, the operating time is regulated by the gaming state. (for example, 1 second) (see FIG. 89(B))). In mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long period of time, if the result of the regular drawing lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the second passage 922 is a win, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 922 Not only the game ball 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315 which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314. Therefore, in mode E, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 to the right in the right area of the game board 31. In addition, in mode B in which the electric support member 93 is short-circuited, it is difficult for the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 to enter the second starting port 315; however, the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922 can enter the second starting port 315. Even in mode B, the game ball can enter the second starting port 315, which is more advantageous in sorting the jackpot type at the time of a jackpot than the first starting port 314 (FIGS. 12(C) and 12(D)). , right-handed hitting is encouraged. In addition, in mode A, there is no time saving (see FIG. 89(B))), and the low probability table is referred to as the normal hit/failure table (see FIG. 13(C))), so the second path 922 is passed. The game ball 99 cannot enter the second starting port 315. On the contrary, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right side area of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 when hitting left-handed can enter. There is. Therefore, in mode A, it is not advisable to hit the ball to the right, but to hit the ball to the left is encouraged so that the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314.

The sorting device 92 is provided on the right side of the symbol display section 341, and sorts game balls when hit to the right. As shown in FIG. 80, the distribution device 92 includes an introduction port 920, a distribution member 94, a first passage 921, a second passage 922, and a synchronization lamp 923. In this sorting device 92, game balls 99 that have entered through the introduction port 920 are directed to the left (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and to the right (in FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the distribution member 94. 5(A) in the clockwise direction), it is sorted into either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922. Note that the introduction port 920, the distribution member 94, the first passage 921, and the second passage 922 are defined by the housing 924. This housing 924 accommodates the distribution member 94 therein, and is made of, for example, a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the sorting device 92, the sorting member 94 is visible from the outside. Note that the housing 924 does not necessarily have to be entirely transparent, and at least as long as the sorting member 94 is visible from the outside. good. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when a synchronization lamp 923 to be described later is provided to notify the attitude of the distribution member 94, the distribution member 94 does not necessarily need to be made visible, and at least the lighting state of the synchronization lamp 923 is should be made visible.

The introduction port 920 is a portion that allows the game balls 99 to enter the distribution device 92. This introduction port 920 is connected to a pair of dowels 31Y that are tapered into a hakama shape and driven into the game board 31 at a lower part of the right side area of the game board 31 (to the right of the symbol display section 341). It is located directly below. The pair of cross nails 31Y can guide all of the game balls 99 shot out to the right side area of the game board 31 to the introduction port 920, and the lowest pair of nails is arranged directly above the introduction port 920. As a result, all the game balls 99 when hitting right are guided to the introduction port 920 by the cross nails 31Y. In other words, all the game balls 99 when being hit right are introduced into the sorting device 92 via the introduction port 920. By introducing all of the game balls 99 when hitting right into the distribution device 92, the game balls 99 hit at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 are introduced into the distribution device 92 with a high probability. It becomes possible to do so. Further, instead of the cross nail 31Y, the game balls 99 may be introduced into the sorting device 92 by passing all the game balls hit to the right through a prescribed route formed of resin or the like. In this case, it becomes possible to make constant the time from when the game ball 99 is launched until it is introduced into the sorting device 92, depending on the distance and speed of movement of the game ball 99 along the prescribed route. As a result, compared to the case where the right-handed game balls 99 are introduced into the sorting device 92 by the cross nail 31Y, the game balls 99 that are hit out at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 have a higher probability. It becomes possible to introduce it into the sorting device 92. Of course, not all of the game balls 99 when hitting right-handed, but only some of the game balls 99 may be introduced into the distribution device 92.

The first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are open downward, and the game balls 99 sorted into the respective passages 921 and 922 are released downward toward the electric support member 93.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), the distribution member 94 distributes the game balls 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, It has a piece 942L, a right ball guide piece 942R, an eccentric part 943, and a load generating part 944. In the distributing member 94, the rotating shaft 941, the ball bearing guiding piece 942, the eccentric part 943, and the load generating part 944 are integrally arranged around the rotating shaft 941 extending in the front-rear direction in the clockwise direction (first direction) in FIG. ) and counterclockwise (second direction).

The ball guide piece 942 includes a left ball guide piece 942L extending upwardly to the left from the rotating shaft 941, and a right ball guide piece 942R extending upwardly to the right. It is provided in a line-symmetrical relationship with the guide piece 942R. This ball receiving guide piece 942 distributes the game balls 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 according to the posture and rotation direction when the distribution member 94 receives the game balls 99. For example, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is in a position where the symmetry axis of the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R is rotated to the left of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise. When the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 by the left ball receiving guide piece 942L, the axis of symmetry is in a position rotated to the right of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise. When the game balls 99 are in the second passage 922, the right ball receiving guide piece 942R distributes the game balls 99 to the second passage 922.

The eccentric portion 943 is integrated with the rotation shaft 941 via a support portion 946 extending downward on the front side of the rotation shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry between the left ball bearing guide piece 942L and the right ball bearing guide piece 942R. ing. The eccentric portion 943 has a cylindrical shape extending in the same direction as the rotating shaft 941, and is offset to the left with respect to the support portion 946. As a result, the distribution member 94 stops at a position rotated counterclockwise in a stationary state. As a result, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is tilted slightly to the left in the stationary state (the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L is slightly lower than the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R), so that the ball receiving guide piece 942 is not connected to the first passage 921. The player waits while the game balls 99 are distributed. In addition, in the distribution member 94, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is tilted to the left in a stationary state by the eccentric portion 943, so that the game balls 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92 are placed in the ball receiving portion. When received by the guiding piece 942, it can be suppressed from remaining stationary. Thereby, when the game balls 99 are introduced into the distribution device 92 when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, ball clogging of the game balls 9 can be suppressed. In addition, since the distribution member 94 is in a state where the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 at the opening time of the game hall, it is possible to prevent so-called morning play, which is an advantageous state for the players when the game hall opens. Countermeasures can be taken. Note that the eccentric portion 943 is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and may have a shape other than a cylindrical shape such as a spherical shape, a hemispherical shape, a prismatic shape, or the like.

The load generating section 944 is a plate spring, and extends downward on the rear side of the rotating shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R. When the load generating section 944 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, it generates elastic force by interfering with a rotation regulating section 945 provided below the distribution member 94 as a whole. Note that as the leaf spring, those made of metal or resin are preferably used.

The rotation regulating portion 945 has an upwardly open U-shape in which a pair of regulating pieces 948 and 949 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body extend upward from the left and right edges of the base portion 947 . Here, the rotation restriction part 945 being a rigid body or a substantially rigid body means that the rotation restriction part 945 does not deform at all or hardly deforms when the load generation part 944 interferes with the rotation restriction part 945 . The rotation regulating section 945 is arranged such that the load generating section 944 is located between a pair of regulating pieces 948 and 949. Therefore, the load generating section 944 generates elastic force by elastically deforming when it interferes with either of the pair of regulating pieces 948, 949. The elastic force generated by the load generating section 944 acts as a force that rotates the distribution member 94 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction when the elastic force is generated. For example, as shown in FIGS. 82(A) and 82(B), when the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise, it interferes with the regulating piece 949 and an elastic force is generated in the load generating portion 944. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 82(B) to 82(D), the load generating section 944 rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. On the contrary, as shown in FIGS. 82(C) and 82(D), when the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise, it interferes with the regulating piece 948, causing the load generating portion 944 to undergo elastic deformation. When an elastic force is generated, the load generating section 944 rotates the distribution member 94 counterclockwise. Note that the rotation regulating portion 945 may omit the base portion 947 and may be configured only with a pair of regulating pieces 948 and 949. Furthermore, the regulating pieces 948 and 949 may be formed as elastic bodies. In this case, the regulating pieces 948 and 949 are elastically deformed when they interfere with the load generating section 944, thereby generating an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94.

Further, the regulating piece 948 is provided with a detection section 95 at a portion where the load generation section 944 interferes. The detection section 95 is a piezoelectric element, and generates a voltage when the load generation section 944 interferes with it. That is, by monitoring the output from the detection section 95, it is possible to detect that the load generation section 944 is interfering with the regulation piece 948. When the load generating section 944 is interfering with the regulating piece 948, the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R is in a position rotated to the left of the vertical axis, so that the detection section Based on the output of 95, it can be known that the distribution section 95 is in a state of distributing game balls to the second passage 922. Note that the detection unit 95 may be a contact switch or an optical sensor instead of the piezoelectric element.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the distribution member 94 is in an attitude slightly tilted to the left (the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L is slightly lower than the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R) in the stationary state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when a game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, the game ball 99 is received by the ball receiving guide piece 942. The distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise. At this time, the load generating section 944 interferes with the regulating piece 949, so that the load generating section 944 is elastically deformed, and the load generating section 944 generates an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. As shown in FIG. 83(B), when the distribution member 94 rotates to a predetermined position, for example, when the tip of the left ball guide piece 942L is located below the horizontal, the game ball 99 is moved to the left ball receiver. It is distributed to the first passage 921 (see FIG. 80) of the distribution device 92 by the guide piece 942L.

Here, when the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 by the distribution member 94, an elastic force is generated in the load generating section 944 that rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force of the load generating section 944. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 83(C) and 83(D), the load generating part 944 interferes with the regulating piece 948, so that the load generating part 944 is elastically deformed, and the load generating part 944 moves the distribution member 94. An elastic force is generated that rotates it counterclockwise. After that, if the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, but the amplitude gradually decreases due to attenuation and finally stops. In other words, the sorting member 94 is in a state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 (distributable state) and a state in which the game balls 99 are easy to be distributed to the second passage 922 before the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state. (distributable state) is repeated multiple times to rotate.

In the rotational movement of the distribution member 94 due to such elastic force, the unit rotation period Ts (see FIG. 88) of the distribution member 94 is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th of the game balls 99 (see FIG. 88). (for example, 1 to 3 times, preferably 1 or 2 times) or a value close to it (for example, in the range of ±15% of a positive integer multiple, preferably in the range of ±10% of a positive integer multiple, more preferably positive (within the range of ±5% of an integral multiple of ). For example, when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds, the unit rotation period Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds. Note that when a plurality of intervals are set as the firing interval of the game balls 99, the unit rotation period Ts of the distribution member 94 is a positive integer multiple of the shortest firing interval or a value close to it.

Here, FIG. 88 shows the change over time in the rotation angle when the distribution member 94 rotates, the output voltage at the detection unit 95 corresponding to this change over time, the firing voltage, and the lighting and lighting of the synchronous lamp 923. The relationship between lights-off control is shown. In addition, in FIG. 88, the rotation angle is 0° when the left ball receiving guiding piece 942K and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R are in bilaterally symmetrical positions with respect to the vertical axis. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 88, the unit rotation period Ts starts from the left switching point Pl at which the distribution member 94 switches the rotation direction from the counterclockwise direction (left rotation direction) to the clockwise direction (right rotation direction), for example. In this case, it is the time it takes to reach the left switching point Pl again via the right switching point Pr where the rotation direction is switched from the clockwise direction to the counterclockwise direction. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the unit rotation period Ts is twice the firing interval Th.

In this way, since the unit rotation period Ts is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable state) and the game balls can be easily distributed to the second passage 922. This makes it easier to link the firing timing of 99. Furthermore, if the timing of firing the game balls 99 and the timing of the distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be made to match, then by performing a stop shot, the game balls can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability. It is also possible to do so. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 88, after the timing of launching the game ball 99 and the timing of distributing it to the second path 922 of the distributing device 92 are matched, the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball are repeated. It is also possible to distribute game balls to the second passage 922 with high probability. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the gaming ball 99 to pass through the second passage 922 with a high probability depending on the skill of the player.

In addition, if the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is rotating, the attitude and rotation direction of the distribution member 94 when the game ball 99 is received by the distribution member 94 is also determined. If the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921. On the contrary, if the posture and rotation direction when the game balls 99 are received by the distribution member 94 are such that the game balls 99 are distributed to the second passage 922, the game balls 99 are distributed to the second passage 922. .

By the way, some conventional game machines are equipped with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting part and a second starting part whose function is different from that of the first starting part. However, in the conventional distribution device, the game balls are physically distributed alternately to the first starting section and the second starting section regardless of the player's intention, so the player does not have a degree of freedom in playing the game. There is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases. In addition, since half of the game balls enter the first starting part, the sorting device is difficult to employ when it is desired to execute a special pattern game mainly based on the second special pattern game, such as in a variable probability game state.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is stationary, so that the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. It can be rotated alternately in the circular direction. In addition, when the distribution member 94 is rotating and the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99, the game ball 99 is moved to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 depending on the receiving posture of the game ball 99, etc. can be sorted into one of the following. Since the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside as described above, the player can confirm the attitude and rotation direction of the distribution member 94. This allows the player to launch the game ball 99 while checking the attitude (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94, so the player can launch the game ball 99 by repeatedly operating and non-operating the ball stop switch 21b. By launching, so-called stopping, it becomes possible to launch the game balls 99 at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922. Furthermore, by alternately launching the game balls 99 one by one into the left and right areas of the game board 31, it is possible to launch the game balls 99 at a time when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922. Become.

The synchronized lamp 923 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 is a light source such as a light emitting diode, for example, and lights up when the sorting member 94 is in the posture of distributing game balls to the second passage 922 of the distributing device 92. The player is informed by the member 94 that it is time to distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. This synchronization lamp 923 is provided at a location that does not obstruct visual recognition of the distribution member 94. A lighting mark 925 is provided on the housing 924 of the sorting device 92 in the front area of the synchronization lamp 923. The lighting mark 925 includes a translucent region 9251 that transmits light, and a mask region 9252 that has low light transmittance and does not transmit light or hardly transmits light (see FIG. 88). The translucent region 9251 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent portion formed in a star shape, and transmits the light of the synchronous lamp 923 when the synchronous lamp 923 is turned on. The mask region 9252 has a circular outer edge at the periphery of the light-transmitting region 9251 so as to surround the light-transmitting region 9251 . This mask region 9252 makes it possible to highlight the light that passes through the translucent region 9251 when the synchronous lamp 923 is turned on, so that it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the synchronous lamp 923 is turned on. Therefore, as in mode C, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 922 are difficult to enter the second starting port 315, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 922 are distributed to the second starting port 315. In this case, it is sufficient to launch the game ball 99 onto the right side area of the game board 31 while checking that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. In addition, when the operating time of the electric support member 93 is long as in mode E, even if the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 when the electric support member 93 is activated, the game balls 99 are not placed in the second starting port 315. Since the game ball 99 can enter the ball, even if the game ball 99 is continuously launched at the minimum firing interval without stopping or the like, the game ball 99 will automatically move between the first passage 921 and the second passage. 922 alternately.

Note that the translucent region 9251 is not limited to a star shape, and may be, for example, a circle or a letter. When the translucent area 9251 is formed as a character, it may be a display indicating the firing timing of the game ball 99, such as "Hit!", "Hit", "CHANCE", "GO", etc. It may be a display that suggests the rotational direction or attitude of the distribution member 94, such as "right" or "left". Further, the outer edge of the mask region 9252 may be set according to the shape of the transparent region 9251, and is not limited to a circular shape.

The synchronous lamp 923 is controlled to turn on and off based on the output voltage from the detection unit 95 according to a command set by the MPU 41 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, when the output voltage from the detection unit 95 is detected (not 0V), the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command to turn on the synchronous lamp 923, and the detection unit 95 If the output voltage from the synchronous lamp 923 is not detected (0V), a synchronous lamp extinguishing command is set to turn off the synchronous lamp 923. On the other hand, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on or off the synchronous lamp 923 according to the synchronous lamp lighting command and the synchronous lamp extinguishing command set by the MPU 41. In other words, the synchronization lamp 923 is lit while the load generation section 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detection section 95. Note that the synchronous lamp 923 may be turned on when the output voltage is equal to or higher than a positive predetermined value. This can prevent the synchronous lamp 923 from being turned on unnecessarily when the output voltage is detected due to vibration or the like.

By the way, since the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is provided with a through gate 319' that performs a lottery to open the second starting port 315, compared to the first passage 921, It is more advantageous for the player that the game balls 99 are sorted into the second passage 922. In this embodiment, since the sorting member 94 is visible, the game balls 99 are hit at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 by stopping, and the game balls 99 are placed in the second passage 922. It becomes possible to aim and shoot so that it is distributed. However, it may be difficult for some players to launch the game balls 99 at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on while the load generation section 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detection section 95. The timing at which the load generating section 944 interferes with the detecting section 95 is a state in which the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922. Therefore, by lighting the synchronization lamp 923, the player is notified that it is the timing when the game balls 99 are likely to be sorted into the second passage 922, and the game balls 99 can be launched using the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 as a guide. becomes possible. As a result, the player can launch the game ball 99 at a timing that makes it easier for the game ball 99 to be guided to the second passage 922, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball 99 while visually confirming the attitude and rotational direction of the distribution member 94. Since it becomes easy to find the game ball 99, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922.

Further, the timing when the game balls 99 are easily guided to the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94 is made to coincide or substantially coincide with the firing timing of the game balls 99 when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922. It is also possible. In this case, the lighting timing of the synchronization lamp 923 not only informs the player of the timing at which the game balls 99 are likely to be sorted into the second passage 922, but also controls the timing at which the game balls 99 are allowed to pass through the second passage 922. The player will be notified of the firing timing. When the synchronization lamp 923 informs the player of the timing of firing the game balls 99, the timing of the game balls 99 passing through the second passage 922 is higher than when the player is informed of the timing when the game balls 99 are more likely to be sorted into the second passage 922. This makes it easier to launch the game ball 99.

Here, FIGS. 89(A) and 89(B) are diagrams showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 89(A) is an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 89(B) is an example of a mode data table. In addition, in this embodiment, the win/fail table regarding the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type distribution table, and the win/fail table regarding the regular lottery are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (FIGS. 12(A) to 12(D) ), see FIGS. 13(C) and 13(D)), jackpot types include 2R probability variable jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 89(A) defines the relationship between the mode transition conditions and the mode transition destination, and the mode data table shown in FIG. 89(B) defines the contents of the mode of the special figure game state. In this embodiment, modes in the special figure game state include mode A, mode B, and mode E. The contents of these modes A, B, and E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 13(B)), and the games that are advantageous to the player are arranged in the order of mode E, mode B, and mode A. state.

Mode A is a mode to which mode B, which is a limited time saving mode to be described later, is entered when the upper limit number of special figure games are completed, that is, when the time saving ends. Mode A is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of being a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 12(A)). Moreover, mode A is a non-time saving mode in which there is no shortening (time saving) of the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' passes the position of the electric support member 93, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 93 operates, winning in the second starting port 315 cannot be expected due to the support of the electric support member 93. Furthermore, mode A is a low probability per normal symbol lottery in which a normal symbol lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability win/fail table (see Figure 13(C)) in which the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win is low. mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(B), in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a win. Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and introduced into the distribution device 92 will enter the second starting port 315 is extremely low. Further, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right side area of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 when hitting left-handed can enter. There is. Therefore, in mode A, it is not a good idea to hit the ball to the right in order to introduce the game ball 99 into the sorting device 92, but it is not a good idea to hit the ball to the left so that the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314. encouraged.

Mode B is a mode that shifts after the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game and 5R normal jackpot game) ends (see FIG. 89 (A)), and is a mode (gaming state) more advantageous for the player than mode A. be. Mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a low probability of becoming a jackpot, similar to mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode win/fail table (see Figure 12 (A)). . In addition, unlike Mode A, Mode B is a time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the maximum number of times the special figure game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times in which an upper limit is set on the number of times of time-saving, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 319' can win a prize in the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 93, and the time between the through gate 319' and the electric support member 93 It is set depending on the positional relationship (distance, etc.) and the operating time of the electric support member 93, and is, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In addition, as shown in FIG. 89(B), in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won, as in mode A; The support of the member 36 allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 to the right in the right area of the game board 31.

In addition, in the case where the upper limit number of special figure games are played without the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot in mode B, the mode shifts to mode A as described above. Further, in this embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed on the effect means such as the symbol display section 341. In this case, the effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of a certain change.

Mode E is a mode that transitions after the end of the probability variable jackpot game (2R probability variation jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, and 16R probability variation jackpot game) (see FIG. 89(A)), and among mode A, mode B, and mode E. This is the most advantageous mode for players. Mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (variable probability gaming state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 12(B)). . Also, like Mode B, Mode E is a time-saving mode in which the fluctuating display time of normal symbols is shortened compared to the normal fluctuating display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time-saving mode, and the next time you hit the jackpot. It is also a time-saving mode with a guaranteed jackpot. In addition, in mode E, it is clearly shown in the performance by the performance means such as the symbol display section 341 that the game is in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode).

In addition, in mode E, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is long (for example, 1 second) when the normal symbol winning lottery is won (see FIG. 89(B))). In mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long period of time, if the result of a lottery with a common figure triggered by a game ball passing through the second passage 922 is a win, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 922 Not only the game ball 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315 which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314. Therefore, in mode E, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 to the right in the right area of the game board 31.

It is also possible that the electric support member 36 operates multiple times in response to one winning in a normal symbol winning lottery. For example, in mode E, the total operating time of the electric support member 93 may be set to 1 second by performing an operation of operating the electric support member 93 for 0.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and number of operations of the electric accessory 93 described above are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 93 in mode E is not limited to 1 second, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device of this embodiment.

In the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 performs sensor detection processing (step S1001), updating processing of random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 (step S1002), updating processing of counters C1 to C4 (step S1003), starting winning processing (step S1004), firing control processing (step S1005), and through gate processing (step S1006). In the main timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 further executes a synchronous lamp control process that controls lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923, unlike the first embodiment described above (step S3201).

[Synchronized lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 90. In the synchronous lamp control process, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 is controlled based on the output of the detection unit 95 and in accordance with the attitude of the distribution member 94.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the synchronous lamp control process, first, the MPU 41 acquires the output voltage from the detection unit 95 (step S3301), and determines whether the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302). If the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3303, and if the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No), the process shifts to step S3306.

<Steps S3303 to S3305>
If the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3303). Here, the synchronous lamp lighting flag indicates whether or not the synchronous lamp 923 is lit, and is set to on in step S3305, which will be described later. That is, in step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. When the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), and when the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 maintains the lighting state of the synchronous lamp 923. The synchronous lamp control process ends. On the other hand, if the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3303: No), the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3304), and also sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to ON (step S3305). , the synchronous lamp control process ends. That is, when the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), and when the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3303: No), the synchronous lamp 923 is activated by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. A synchronous lamp lighting command for lighting is set (step S3304), and a synchronous lamp lighting flag indicating that the synchronous lamp 923 is lit is set on (step S3305), and the synchronous lamp control process ends. .

Note that the synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S3304 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process of FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent area 9251, the player can confirm that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a position where it can distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. can be recognized. Also, the timing when the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture that allows the game balls 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922, and the timing when the game balls are launched so that the game balls 99 can pass through the second passage 922. If they match or substantially match, the player can recognize that it is the timing to shoot the game ball at which the game ball 99 can pass through the second passage 922. Then, by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251 is lit, the player can determine the timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passage 922 (when the game balls 99 enter the second starting port 315). It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at a convenient timing. When confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent area 9251, the player can more easily insert the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 than by visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94. It becomes possible to let the ball enter.

<Steps S3306 to S3308>
If the output voltage is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302: No), the MPU 41 sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to ON in order to determine whether the synchronous lamp 923 is lit. It is determined whether or not (step S3306). The MPU 41 controls the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 of the synchronous lamp 923 when the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No), and when the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3306: Yes). A synchronous lamp extinguishing command for turning off the synchronous lamp 923 is set (step S3307), a synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3308), and the synchronous lamp control process ends. Furthermore, if the output voltage is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (step S3302: No), and if the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3306: No), the MPU 41 turns off the synchronous lamp 923. In order to maintain the state, the synchronous lamp control process is ended.

Note that the synchronous lamp extinguishing command set in step S3307 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns off the light in step S3509 in the command determination process of FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the translucent area 9251, the player can confirm that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture that makes it difficult to distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. can be recognized.

[Main processing]
In this embodiment, the main process is executed in the same way as in the first embodiment described above, but unlike the first embodiment described above, mode A, mode B, and mode E are selected as the types of special figure gaming states. There are no mode C or mode D. Therefore, in this embodiment, some of the steps related to modes in various processes in the main process are different from the above-described first embodiment. Specifically, in the normal electric accessory control process in FIG. 18 (step S1305 of the main process in FIG. 17), "mode A to mode C?" in step S1504 becomes "mode A or mode B?" In the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1308 of the main process in FIG. 17), "mode C or mode E?" in step S1801 becomes "mode E?". Then, the gaming state transition process in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 is executed as the process described below.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the gaming state transition process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

<Step S3401>
In this embodiment, as described above, there are three types of special figure game states: mode A, mode B, and mode E, and mode C and mode D are not available. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, in the gaming state transition process of this embodiment, step S1913 when ending the time saving and transitioning to mode A in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 23 of the first embodiment described above is performed. "Turn off mode B flag or mode D flag" becomes "turn off mode B flag" (step S3401).

<Step S3402>
When ending the jackpot game (steps S1901, S1914 and S1915), the MPU 41 checks whether the lottery result flag set to ON in step S1806 in the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 22 is the normal jackpot flag or not. It is determined whether the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot flag is set on (step S3402). If the normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3403, and if the normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3403. The process moves to S3407.

<Steps S3403 to S3406>
In step S3403, when ending the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game or 5R normal jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets on a time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time saving times as a time saving counter. The number of time saving times is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S3404) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S3405). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S3406), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E, and further sets the mode E flag to ON (step S3408). That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and the normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), the probability variable jackpot flag (2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and It can be determined that any of the 16R probability-variable jackpot flags) is set on. Therefore, in steps S3407 and S3408, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the destination mode after the end of the variable probability jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 turns off the probability variable jackpot flag that has been set to on (step S3409), and ends the game state transition process.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1954 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 25. In the command determination process, a command received from the main controller 4 is determined and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 93, in the command determination process of this embodiment, first in step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (S3501: Yes), the process moves to step S3502. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S3501 and becomes the target of processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area. be remembered.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3503, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3506.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols, variation type, and production type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table and the performance type table stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the counter value of the performance type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets on the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 2R normal jackpot, sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 2R normal jackpot. If is a 2R probability variable jackpot, set the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to ON, if the jackpot type is a 5R probability variation jackpot, set the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON, and if the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot, set the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON. Set the jackpot flag to on.

Note that the performance type table includes, for example, a normal reach performance table corresponding to normal reach, a super reach performance table corresponding to super reach, and a special reach performance table corresponding to special reach.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1953 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. It is possible to judge the remaining time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the count value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and production type of the main symbols in the symbol display section 341, and ends the command determination process. let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and production type of the main symbols determined in step S3503. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores main symbol variation images, performance images, etc. corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol variation display of the next variable game or the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the fluctuating display of the main symbol, a performance corresponding to the content of the fluctuation type and performance type specified by the display fluctuation pattern command is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
In step S3506, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a synchronous lamp lighting command. The synchronous lamp lighting command is a command indicating that the synchronous lamp 923 is to be turned on, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S3304 in the synchronous lamp control process in FIG. 91 as described above. Here, if the received command is a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3707). On the other hand, if the received command is not a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3508.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
In step S3508, it is determined whether the received command is a synchronous lamp extinguishing command. The synchronous lamp extinguishing command is a command indicating to turn off the synchronous lamp 923, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S3307 in the synchronous lamp control process of FIG. 91 as described above. Here, if the received command is a synchronous lamp extinguishing command (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3709). On the other hand, if the received command is not a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3508: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting section and a second starting section whose function is different from that of the first starting section. Unlike conventional gaming machines, by introducing game balls into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 can be rotated alternately in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. Specifically, when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, the eccentric portion 943 is in a posture to distribute the game balls 99 to the first passage 921. When the game balls 99 are introduced into the device 92, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 by rotating the distribution member 94 in a counterclockwise direction. At this time, the load generating section 944 interferes with the regulating piece 948, so that the load generating section 944 is elastically deformed, and an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction is generated in the load generating section 944. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force of the load generating section 944. After that, if the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, but the amplitude gradually decreases due to attenuation and finally stops. In other words, the distribution member 94 is in a state where the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 (distributable state) and a state where the game balls 99 are easy to be distributed to the second passage 922 until the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state. (distributable state) is repeated multiple times.

In addition, when the distribution member 94 is rotating and the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99, the game ball 99 is moved to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 depending on the receiving posture of the game ball 99, etc. can be sorted into one of the following. The distribution member 94 receives the game balls 99 during rotation and distributes the game balls 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, thereby continuing the rotation operation in the same manner as before attenuation.

Here, since the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside as described above, it is possible to visually recognize the rotational movement of the distribution member 94, and while checking the posture (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94, It becomes possible to perform 99 launches. Therefore, the player can hit the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by repeatedly operating and not operating the ball stopping switch 21b to hit the game ball 99, so-called stop hitting. It becomes possible. Since the unit rotation period Ts of the distribution member 94 is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th of the game balls 99 or a value close to it, the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distribution is possible). This makes it easier to link the state) with the firing timing of the game ball 99. Furthermore, if the timing of firing the game balls 99 and the timing of the distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be made to match, then the game balls can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop shot. It is also possible to do so.

Further, the regulating piece 948 is provided with a detecting section 95 at a portion where the load generating section 944 interferes, and by monitoring the output from the detecting section 95, the load generating section 944 interferes with the regulating piece 948. It can be detected that there is a When the load generating section 944 is interfering with the regulating piece 948, the game balls can be distributed to the second passage 922, so the distribution member 94 is assigned to the second passage 922 based on the output of the detection section 95. It is possible to know that the game balls are to be distributed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 are distributed to the second path 922 by lighting the synchronization lamp 923 while the load generating section 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detection section 95. The player is informed that it is an easy timing. This allows the player to launch the game ball 99 using the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 as a guide, so the timing of launching the game ball 99 when the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922, that is, the ball It becomes easy to find the timing to change the stop switch 21b from the operated state to the non-operated state.

<40th to 73rd embodiments>
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the load generating section 944 provided in the distribution member 94 repeatedly interferes with the regulating pieces 948, 949 of the rotation regulating section 945, so that an elastic force is generated in the load producing section 944, and the elastic force is generated in the load generating section 944. A case has been described in which the distribution member 94 rotates due to elastic force. On the other hand, the 40th to 73rd embodiments have a common point in that the distribution member is rotated by elastic force, but the structure that generates the elastic force to cause the distribution member to perform the rotation operation is different. This is different from the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. In the 40th to 73rd embodiments, the distribution member rotates due to the elastic force generated by the rotation of the distribution member, so it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. can. Hereinafter, the differences from the foregoing 39th embodiment will be explained for each of the 40th to 73rd embodiments with reference to the drawings. Note that in the drawings referred to in the description of each embodiment, the same components as in other embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.

(40th to 47th embodiments)
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the load generating section 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a leaf spring protrudes downward behind the rotating shaft 941, and the rotation regulating section 945 that interferes with the load generating section 944 functions as the load generating section. It was installed at a lower position overall than 944. On the other hand, in the fortieth to forty-seventh embodiments, the configurations of the load generating section and the rotation regulating section are different from the foregoing thirty-ninth embodiment.

(40th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generation portion 944A of the distribution member 94A protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941, and the rotation regulating portion 945A is larger than the distribution member 94A. It is generally placed upwards.

The rotation regulating portion 945A has a base portion 947A and a pair of regulating pieces 948A and 949A extending downward from the base portion 947A, and is formed in a U-shape that opens downward. A detection section 95 is provided on the regulation piece 949A.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the protruding direction of the load generating part 944A is different from that of the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and the direction of the rotation regulating part 945A is different, but the same effect as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment is achieved. be effective.

(41st embodiment)
Here, FIG. 95(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 95(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. It is. As shown in FIGS. 95(A) and 95(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94B is connected to the rotating shaft 941, as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. It has a load generation part 944 that protrudes downward from the distribution member 94B, and includes a rotation restriction part 945 that interferes with the load generation part 944 when the distribution member 94B rotates. The distribution device 92 of this embodiment further has a load generation section 944A in which the distribution member 94B protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941 opposite to the load generation section 944, as in the fortieth embodiment described above. , a rotation regulating section 945B with which the load generating section 944A interferes when the distribution member 94B rotates. In other words, the sorting device 92 of this embodiment has a configuration that is a combination of the aforementioned 39th embodiment and 40th embodiment.

The sorting device 92 of this embodiment has a configuration that combines the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and 40th embodiment, so it has the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and 40th embodiment. play. Further, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944 and the load generation section 944A protrude in opposite directions, and the load generation sections 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation regulation sections 945 and 945B at the same timing. . Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generating parts 944, 944A, but also the impact when the load generating parts 944, 944A interfere with the rotation regulating parts 945, 945B can be reduced. can. Thereby, even if the load generating parts 944, 944A repeatedly interfere with the rotation regulating parts 945, 945B, damage to the load generating parts 944, 944A can be suppressed.

(42nd and 43rd embodiment)
Here, FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the forty-second embodiment, and FIG. 96(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the forty-third embodiment. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 96(A) and 96(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the forty-second and forty-third embodiments includes the same sorting member 94B as in the forty-first embodiment. However, the configuration of the rotation restricting portion 945 is different from that of the forty-first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), in the forty-second embodiment, a rotation regulating section 945C is formed in a case shape surrounding the load generating section 944 and the load generating section 944A of the distribution member 94B. The rotation regulating portion 945C includes a pair of side walls 948C and 949C extending between an upper wall 9471C and a lower wall 9472C. When the distribution member 94B rotates, the load generating section 944 and the load generating section 944A interfere with the pair of side walls 948C and 949C. The pair of side walls 948C and 949C are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and a detection section 95 made of a piezoelectric element or the like is provided on the side wall 948C. Note that the rotation regulating portion 945C only needs to have a pair of side walls 948C and 949C, and one or both of the upper wall 9471C and the lower wall 9472C may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94B similar to that of the forty-first embodiment described above, and the load generation parts 944 and 944A interfere with the side walls 948C and 949C of the rotation restriction part 94C at the same timing. . Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment as well, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generating parts 944, 944A, but also the load generating parts 944, 944A can repeatedly interfere with the rotation regulating parts 945, 945A. Even if the load generating portions 944, 944A are damaged, damage to the load generating portions 944, 944A can be prevented.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(B), in the forty-third embodiment, the rotation restriction section includes a pair of restriction pieces 948D and 949D. These regulating pieces 948D and 949D are arranged vertically at a predetermined interval, and a detecting section 95 made of a piezoelectric element or the like is provided on the regulating piece 948D.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94B rotates, the load generation section 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948D of the rotation regulation section, and the load generation section interferes with the regulation piece 949D. The state in which 944A interferes is repeated. In this embodiment, compared to the forty-second embodiment described above, which includes the same distribution member 94B, the distribution member 94B can be rotated using elastic force with a simpler configuration.

(44th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 97(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. It is. As shown in FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a load generating portion 944E protrudes to the right from the rotating shaft 941 in the distribution member 94E, and rotates. The regulating portion 945E is provided to the right of the distribution member 94E as a whole.

The rotation regulating portion 945E has a base 947E and a pair of regulating pieces 948E and 949E extending leftward from the base 947E, and is formed in a U-shape that opens to the left. A detection section 95 is provided on the regulation piece 948E.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the protruding direction of the load generating part 944E is different from that of the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and the direction of the rotation regulating part 945E is different, but the same effect as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment is achieved. be effective.

(45th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 98(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 98(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. It is. As shown in FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the distribution member 94F is connected to the rotating shaft 941, as in the forty-fourth embodiment described above. It has a load generation part 944E that protrudes to the right from the center, and includes a rotation restriction part 945E that interferes with the load generation part 944E when the distribution member 94F rotates. In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the distribution member 94F further has a load generation portion 944F that protrudes from the rotating shaft 941 to the left opposite to the distribution member 94E, and a load is generated when the distribution member 94F rotates. A rotation regulating portion 945F that interferes with the portion 944F is provided.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment has a load generating section 944E like the forty-fourth embodiment described above, and thus has the same effects as the forty-fourth embodiment described above. Furthermore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944E and the load generation section 944F protrude in opposite directions, and these load generation sections 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation restriction sections 945E and 945F at the same timing. . Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generating parts 944E and 944F, but also the impact when the load generating parts 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation regulating parts 945E and 945F can be reduced. can. Thereby, even if the load generating parts 944E, 944F repeatedly interfere with the rotation regulating parts 945E, 945F, damage to the load generating parts 944E, 944F can be suppressed.

(46th and 47th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 46th embodiment, and FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 47th embodiment. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 99(A) and 99(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the forty-sixth and forty-seventh embodiments has the same sorting member 94F as the forty-fifth embodiment described above. However, the configuration of the rotation regulating portion 945 is different from that of the forty-first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), in the forty-sixth embodiment, a rotation restricting portion 945G is formed in a case shape surrounding a load generating portion 944E and a load generating portion 944F of a distribution member 94F. This rotation regulating portion 945G includes a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G extending between a pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G. When the distribution member 94F rotates, the load generation section 944E and the load generation section 944F interfere with the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G. The lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G face each other at a predetermined interval, and the lower wall 948G is provided with a detection section 95 made of a piezoelectric element or the like. Note that the rotation restricting portion 945G only needs to have a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G, and one or both of the pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94F similar to that of the forty-fifth embodiment described above, and the load generation sections 944E and 944F are connected to the lower wall 948G or the upper wall 949G of the rotation regulating section 94G at the same timing. interfere with Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment as well, not only can the elastic force be generated by the two load generating parts 944E and 944F, but also the load generating parts 944E and 944F can repeatedly act on the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G of the rotation regulating part 945G. Even in the case where the load generation parts 944E and 944F interfere with each other, damage to the load generation parts 944E and 944F can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(B), in the forty-seventh embodiment, the rotation regulating section includes a pair of regulating pieces 948H and 949H. These regulating pieces 948H and 949H are arranged on the left and right at a predetermined interval, and a detecting section 95 made of a piezoelectric element or the like is provided on the regulating piece 948H.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94F rotates, the load generation section 944F interferes with the regulation piece 948H of the rotation regulation section, and the load generation section 944E interferes with the regulation piece 949H. This state of interference is repeated. In this embodiment, compared to the forty-fifth embodiment described above, which includes the same distribution member 94F, the distribution member 94H can be rotated using elastic force with a simpler configuration.

Note that the load generating section may protrude leftward from the rotating shaft, and the rotation regulating section may be arranged entirely to the left of the load generating section. Furthermore, the load generating section may protrude from the rotation shaft in directions other than up, down, right and left.

(48th embodiment)
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the load generating section 944 of the distribution member 94 was formed as a leaf spring. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment in that the load generating section includes a compression coil spring. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the load generating section includes a compression coil spring, the configuration of the rotation regulating section is also different from the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a load generating portion 944I in which the distribution member 94I protrudes downward toward the rear side of the rotating shaft 941, and a load generation portion 944I in which the distribution member 94I rotates. It includes a left interference surface 9451I and a right interference surface 9452I with which the load generation section 944I interferes when the load generation section 944I does.

The load generating section 944I includes an arm section 9441I extending downward from the rotating shaft 941, and a pair of compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I fixed to the distal end side of the arm section 9441I. The pair of compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I includes a left compression coil spring 9442I that projects slightly upward to the left from arm portion 9441I, and a right compression coil spring 9443I that projects slightly upward to the right from arm portion 9441I. The compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I are compressed when the load generating section 944I interferes with the interference surfaces 9451I, 9452I due to rotation of the distribution member 94I, and generate elastic force. The distribution member 94I is rotated in the opposite direction by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I. In other words, the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I have the same function as the load generating section 944 of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. A left interference plate 9444I that can interfere with the left interference surface 9451I is fixed on the tip side of the left compression coil spring 9442I. A right interference plate 9445I that can interfere with the right interference surface 9452I is fixed to the right compression coil spring 9443I on the distal end side. Each interference plate 9444I, 9445I is fixed at a slight inclination with respect to the vertical direction since each compression coil spring 9442I, 9443I projects slightly upward in the horizontal direction.

Each of the interference surfaces 9451I, 9452I is a rotation regulating portion that interferes with the interference plates 9444I, 9445I of the load generating portion 944I when the distribution member 94I rotates, thereby regulating the rotation of the distribution member 94I. The interference surfaces 9451I, 9452I are inclined similarly to the interference plates 9444I, 9445I so that they can come into surface contact with the interference plates 9444I, 9445I. This not only makes it possible to effectively compress the compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I when the interference plates 9444I, 9445I interfere with the interference surfaces 9451I, 9452I, but also efficiently utilizes the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I. The distribution member 94I can be rotated by using this.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, when the sorting member 94I rotates clockwise, the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I, and the sorting member 94I rotates counterclockwise. In this case, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I. When the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94I, the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed, and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9442I. Furthermore, when the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9442I expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I. As a result, the distribution member 94I is rotated counterclockwise. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94I is rotated counterclockwise, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I, and an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9443I, causing the right compression The distribution member 94I is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9443I. Therefore, when the distribution member 94I rotates clockwise, the left interference plate 9444I of the load generating section 944I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I. By repeating the state in which the right interference plate 9445I of the load generating section 944I interferes with the load generating section 944I, it is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I and the right compression coil spring 9443I. Therefore, although this embodiment also differs from the aforementioned 39th embodiment in the configurations of the load generating section and the rotation regulating section, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the aforementioned 39th embodiment.

Although FIG. 100 does not show a detection unit that detects that game balls are likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, a detection unit is also provided in this embodiment. It is preferable. In this case, the detection section is provided on the right interference surface 9452I or the right interference plate 9445I when configured to include a piezoelectric element, for example. Of course, the detection unit may be provided in a portion other than the right interference surface 9452I and the right interference plate 9445I, and may be configured to include a contact switch or an optical sensor.

(49th embodiment)
In the forty-eighth embodiment described above, the load generating section 944I of the distribution member 94I includes compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I, and the rotational operation of the distribution member 94I is performed by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I, 9443I. explained. In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the forty-eighth embodiment described above in that the rotational movement of the distribution member is executed using the elastic force of the compression coil spring, but the distribution member generates a load. This embodiment differs from the forty-eighth embodiment described above in that a compression coil spring (load acting part) that generates elastic force is provided separately from the distribution member.

Here, FIG. 101(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 101(B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 101(A) and 101(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the distribution member 94J includes a load input section 940J. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a pair of load application parts 961J and 962J that interfere with the load input part 940J that interferes when the distribution member 94J rotates. Note that in FIGS. 100(A) and 100(B), a detection unit that detects that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is not shown; Also in this embodiment, it is preferable to provide a detection section as in the forty-eighth embodiment described above.

The load input section 940J of the distribution member 94J protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941 like the load generation section 944 of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, but unlike the load generation section 944 described above, it is a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. It is formed as. Here, the term "load input section 940J is rigid or substantially rigid" means that load input section 940J does not deform at all or hardly deforms when load application sections 961J and 962J interfere with load input section 940J. This load input part 940J has a rotating piece 9401J that is continuous with the rotating shaft 941, and an interference part 9402J that rotates integrally with this rotating piece 9401J and interferes with the load application parts 961J and 962J. It is rotatable about an axis 941.

The load application parts 961J and 962J include a left load application part 961J and a right load application part 962J. The left load application section 961J includes a left compression coil spring 9611J. The left compression coil spring 9611J has a base end fixed to the left fixing surface 9612J and protrudes from the left fixing surface 9612J in a downward direction to the right. Furthermore, a left interference plate 9613J is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611J. The right load acting section 962J includes a right compression coil spring 9621J. The right compression coil spring 9621J has a base end fixed to the right fixing surface 9622J and protrudes downward from the right fixing surface 9622J to the left. Furthermore, a right interference plate 9623J is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9621J.

Here, the left compression coil spring 9611J is disposed downward to the right, and the right compression coil spring 9621J is disposed downward to the left. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc restriction) of 9402J. Further, the left interference plate 9613J and the right interference plate 9623J are arranged on the rotation locus of the interference part 9402J in the load input part 940J when the distribution member 94J rotates. Thereby, when the distribution member 94J rotates, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J or the right interference plate 9623J. Note that the left fixing surface 9612J and the right fixing surface 9622J can be provided by forming a through hole or a recess in the game board 31, and a member having the left fixing surface 9612J and the right fixing surface 9622J can be provided on the game board 31. It may also be provided that it is fixed.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, the interference part 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, and interferes when the sorting member 94J rotates counterclockwise. The portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed, and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611J. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611J expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611J. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J, and an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9621J. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621J. Therefore, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J. By repeating this, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J. Therefore, although this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J, it has the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. be able to.

In addition, the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J are arranged so that their expansion and contraction directions are along the tangential direction of the movement locus (circular arc regulation) of the interference part 9402J, so that the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J can be effectively Since the distribution member 94J can be compressed and expanded, it is possible to appropriately rotate the distribution member 94J.

(50th to 52nd embodiments)

Here, FIG. 102(A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in the fiftieth embodiment. FIG. 102(B) is a sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in the 51st embodiment. FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the essential parts of the sorting device in the 52nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102(A), FIG. 102(B), and FIG. 103, the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 50th to 52nd embodiments has the same sorting device as the forty-ninth embodiment described above. Although this embodiment includes a member 94J, the configuration of the load acting section is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment described above. In addition, in FIG. 102(A), FIG. 102(B), and FIG. 103, a detection unit that detects that a game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is not shown. Also in the 50th to 52nd embodiments, it is preferable to provide a detection section in the same manner as in the foregoing 48th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), load application sections 961K and 962K of the fiftieth embodiment include a left load application section 961K and a right load application section 962K. The left load application section 961K includes a left compression coil spring 9611K and a left interference arm 9613K. The base end of the left compression coil spring 9611K is fixed to the left fixing surface 9612K, and the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611K is in contact with the left interference arm 9613K. The left interference arm 9613K has a base end rotatably fixed by the left rotation support part 9614K, and a distal end part arranged at a position where the interference part 9402J of the load input part 940 in the distribution member 94J can interfere. There is. The right load application section 962K includes a right compression coil spring 9621K and a right interference arm 9623K. The right compression coil spring 9621K has a base end fixed to the right fixing surface 9622K, and a distal end contacting the right interference arm 9623K. The right interference arm 9623K has a base end rotatably fixed by a right rotation support part 9624K, and a distal end part arranged at a position where the interference part 9402J of the load input part 940 in the distribution member 94J can interfere. There is. Note that the left fixing surface 9612K and the right fixing surface 9622K can be provided by forming through holes or recesses in the game board 31, and the game board 31 can be provided with a member having the left fixing surface 9612K and the right fixing surface 9622K. It may also be provided that it is fixed.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the tip of the left interference arm 9613K, and the sorting member 94J rotates counterclockwise. In this case, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K. When the interference part 9402J interferes with the tip of the left interference arm 9613K due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left interference arm 9613K rotates clockwise while compressing the left compression coil spring 9611K, and the left compression coil spring An elastic force is generated at 9611K. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611K is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611K expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K, causing the right interference arm 9623K to rotate counterclockwise. Due to the movement, an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9621K, and the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated in the right compression coil spring 9621K. Therefore, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the left interference arm 9613K, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623J. By repeating this, it is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K and the right compression coil spring 9612K. Therefore, although this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J, it can achieve the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 102(B), the load application sections 961L and 962L of the 51st embodiment include a left load application section 961L and a right load application section 962L. The left load application section 961L includes a left compression coil spring 9611L. The left compression coil spring 9611L is entirely housed in the left housing portion 9612L, and a left interference plate 9613L is fixed to the tip. The left housing portion 9612L is inclined upward to the left, and the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged upward to the left. The right load acting section 962L includes a right compression coil spring 9621L. The right compression coil spring 9621L is entirely housed in the right housing portion 9622L, and a right interference plate 9623L is fixed to the tip. The right housing portion 9622L is inclined upward to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged upward to the left. Here, the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged upward to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged upward to the right. For example, the compression coil springs 9611L and 9621L have an expansion/contraction direction that is an interference part of the load input section 940J in the distribution member 94J. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc restriction) of 9402J.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, and interferes with the left interference plate 9613L when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise. The portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed, and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611L. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611L expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611L. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L, and an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9621L. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621L. Therefore, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L, and when it rotates counterclockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L. By repeating this, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L. Therefore, although this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J, it can achieve the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Can be done.

In addition, the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L are arranged so that their expansion and contraction directions are along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of the interference part 9402J, thereby effectively compressing the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L. Since the distribution member 94J can be extended and extended, it becomes possible to appropriately rotate the distribution member 94J.

As shown in FIG. 103, the load application section 961M of the 52nd embodiment includes a left compression coil spring 9611M and a right compression coil spring 9612M. The compression coil springs 9611M and 9612M are entirely housed in a housing portion 9613M and are arranged horizontally. Further, a left interference plate 9614M is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611M, and a right interference plate 9615M is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9612M. The left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M are always in contact with the interference part 9402J of the load input part 940J in the distribution member 94J. In other words, the interference portion 9402J is arranged between the left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M. Here, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, both the left compression coil spring 9611M and the right compression coil spring 9612M are in a compressed state, but the interference portion 9402J is moved from the center due to the action of the eccentric portion 943 of the distribution member 94J. It is also located on the right side. That is, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, the right compression coil spring 9612M is more compressed than the left compression coil spring 9611M.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference portion 9402J moves the left interference plate 9614M to the left, and the left compression coil spring 9611M is compressed. Here, since the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed compared to the left compression coil spring 9611M in a stationary state, it expands when the interference part 9402J rotates clockwise, and the right interference plate 9615M follows the interference part 9402J. and move to the left. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611M is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611M expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise, the interference portion 9402J moves the right interference plate 9615M to the right, and the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed. At this time, as the interference part 9402J rotates counterclockwise, the left interference plate 9614M follows the interference part 9402J and moves to the right. Further, when the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed by a certain amount, the right compression coil spring 9612M expands due to the elastic force generated by the right compression coil spring 9612M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise. Therefore, the rotation of the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction generates an elastic force in the left compression coil spring 9611M that rotates the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction, and the rotation of the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction generates an elastic force in the left compression coil spring 9611M. The distribution member 94J is rotated by repeating a state in which the right compression coil spring 9612M generates an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94J clockwise due to the rotation. Therefore, although this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J, it can achieve the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Can be done.

(53rd embodiment)
In the forty-ninth embodiment described above, the load acting parts 961J and 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J include compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J, and the distribution member 94J is caused by the elastic force generated in the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J. I have explained the case where it is rotated. On the other hand, the 53rd embodiment is similar to the 49th embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated using the elastic force of a spring of a load acting section provided separately from the distribution member. However, this embodiment differs from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in that the spring that generates the elastic force is a torsion coil spring.

Here, FIG. 104(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing the torsion coil spring of FIG. 104(A).

As shown in FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same distribution member 94J as in the forty-ninth embodiment described above. Further, the load applying parts 961N and 962N of this embodiment include a left torsional load applying part 961N including a left torsion coil spring 9611N, and a right load applying part 962N including a right torsion coil spring 9621N. The torsion coil springs 9611N, 9621N have fixed terminal portions 9612N, 9622N, movable terminal portions 9613N, 9623N, and coil portions 9614N, 9624N, and have the same configuration.

The fixed terminal portions 9612N, 9622N are portions for fixing the torsion coil springs 9611N, 9621N to the fixed surface 963N, and are formed continuously to the coil portions 9614N, 9624N. The movable end portions 9613N, 9623N are movable in the direction toward and away from the fixed end portions 9612N, 9622N, and are formed continuously with the coil portions 9614N, 9624N. An interference portion 9402J of the distribution member 94J is in contact with the movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N. Here, the distribution member 94J is in a state where the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 of the distribution device 92 by the eccentric portion 943 in the stationary state as described above. That is, the distribution member 94J is stopped at a position slightly rotated counterclockwise compared to the case where the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R are in symmetrical positions in a stationary state. When the coil parts 9614N and 9624N are moved to the movable terminal part 9613N by the rotation of the interference part 9402J, elastic force is generated, and the elastic force generated in the coil parts 9614N and 9624N moves the interference part 9402J and eventually the distribution member 94J in the opposite direction. Rotate in the direction.

Note that in FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), a detection unit that detects that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is not shown; Also in this embodiment, it is preferable to provide a detection section in the movable terminal sections 9613N and 9623N, as in the forty-eighth embodiment described above.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J moves the movable terminal part 9613N of the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N in a direction to bring it closer to the fixed terminal part 9612N. As a result, a load is applied to the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N in the winding direction. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, an elastic force is generated in the left-handed torsional coil spring 9611N. In addition, when the movable end portion 9613N of the left torsion coil spring 9611N moves by a certain torsion angle in the winding direction, the movable end portion 9613N moves in the opposite direction to the winding direction due to the elastic force generated by the left torsion coil spring 9611N. Move in the direction of development. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise, the interference portion 9402J moves the movable end portion 9623N of the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N in a direction that brings it closer to the fixed end portion 9622N. A load is applied to the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N in the winding direction. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise, an elastic force is generated in the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N. Furthermore, when the movable end portion 9623N of the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N moves by a certain torsional angle in the winding direction, the movable end portion 9623N moves in the deployment direction due to the elastic force generated by the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N. . As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise. Therefore, due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, an elastic force is generated in the left torsion coil spring 9611N to rotate the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction, and the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The distribution member 94J is rotated by repeating a state in which an elastic force is generated in the right-handed torsion coil spring 9612N to rotate the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction. Therefore, although this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J, it can achieve the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 105, in this embodiment, the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N and the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N have movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N that are connected to the distribution member 94J when the distribution member 94J is at rest. It may be placed apart from the interference portion 9402J. Furthermore, when the distribution member 94J is in a stationary state, the movable end portion of one of the left torsion coil springs 9611N and the right torsion coil spring 9621N contacts the interference portion 9402J, and the other torsion coil spring The movable terminal portion may be placed apart from the interference portion 9492J. Furthermore, the torsion coil spring may be configured as part of the distribution member. For example, instead of the compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring may be used as the load generating section in the forty-eighth embodiment (see FIG. 100).

(54th to 67th embodiments)
In the forty-ninth embodiment described above, the case where the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9611J, 9621J of the load application parts 961J, 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J has been described. . Furthermore, in the 53rd embodiment, a case has been described in which the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the torsion coil springs 9611N and 9621N of the load application parts 961N and 962N. On the other hand, in the 54th to 67th embodiments, the above-mentioned 49th and 67th embodiments rotate the distribution member using the elastic force generated in the load acting section provided separately from the distribution member. Although this embodiment is common to the 53rd embodiment, it differs from the 49th and 53rd embodiments described above in that a leaf spring is used to generate the elastic force.

(54th embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 106(A) to 106(C) are diagrams showing an example of essential parts of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106(A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94 similar to the aforementioned 39th embodiment, and a distribution device 92 that is different from the aforementioned 39th embodiment. and a different load acting section 961O. The distribution member 94 has a load generating section 944 extending downward from the rotating shaft 941. The load generating section 944 is configured as a leaf spring. The load acting section 961O includes a left leaf spring 9611O and a right leaf spring 9612O. The leaf springs 9611O and 9612O extend upward from the horizontal support surface 9613O in a facing state, and when the distribution member 94 rotates, the tip of the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 can interfere with the entire body. It is arranged below the load acting part 961O.

As shown in FIG. 106(B), in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise, the load generation section 944 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611O, and the load generation section 944 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611O. Both the left leaf spring 9611O and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed. As a result, when the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise, elastic force is generated in both the load generating section 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O. Further, when the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise due to the elastic force generated by both the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O.

On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 106(C), in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise, the load generation section 944 , and both the load generating section 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed. As a result, when the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise, elastic force is generated in both the load generating section 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O. Furthermore, when the load generating section 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise due to the elastic force generated by both the load generating section 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O.

As described above, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the rotation of the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction causes the elastic force in the load generation section 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O to rotate the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction. The state in which this occurs and the state in which the rotation of the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction generates an elastic force in the load generating section 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O that rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction are repeated. As a result, the distribution member 94 is rotated. Therefore, although this embodiment is partially different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94, it has the same effects as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. can be played.

(55th to 60th embodiments)
In the above-described 54th embodiment, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a leaf spring protrudes downward at the rear of the rotating shaft 941, and the load acting portion 961O that interferes with the load generating portion 944 protrudes upward. The load generating section 961O, which is formed as plate springs 9611O and 9612O that interfere with the load generating section 944, is provided at a lower position than the load generating section 944 as a whole. On the other hand, the 55th to 60th embodiments are similar to the 54th embodiment described above in that the load generating section and the load acting section are configured as leaf springs, and the load generating section and the load acting section are similar to the above-mentioned 54th embodiment. The structure of the section is different from the above-described 54th embodiment.

(55th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944P1 protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941 in the distribution member 94P1, and the load acting portion 961P1 is connected to the distribution member 94P1. It is provided entirely above 94P1. Specifically, the load application portion 961P1 includes a left leaf spring 9611P1 and a right leaf spring 9612P2, and the leaf springs 9611P1 and 9612P2 extend downward from the horizontal support surface 9613P1 in a facing state.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the protruding direction of the load generating part 944P1 is different from that of the above-mentioned 54th embodiment, and the direction of the load acting part 961P1 is different, but the same effect as in the above-mentioned 54th embodiment is achieved. be effective.

(56th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a load is generated in which the distribution member 94P2 protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941, as in the 54th embodiment described above. 944, and includes a load generation section 961O with which the load generation section 944 interferes when the distribution member 94P1 rotates. In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the distribution member 94P2 further has a load generating portion 944P1 that projects upward from the rotating shaft 941, as in the aforementioned 55th embodiment, and when the distribution member 94P2 rotates, It includes a load acting part 961P1 with which the load generating part 944P1 interferes. In other words, the sorting device 92 of this embodiment has a configuration that is a combination of the above-described 54th embodiment and 55th embodiment.

The sorting device 92 of this embodiment has a configuration that combines the above-mentioned 54th embodiment and 55th embodiment, so it has the same effects as the above-mentioned 54th embodiment and 55th embodiment. play. Furthermore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944 and the load generation section 944P1 protrude in opposite directions, and these load generation sections 944, 944P1 interfere with the load application sections 961O, 961P1 at the same timing. . Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load application parts 961O, 961P1 in addition to the two load generation parts 944, 944P1, but also the load generation parts 944, 944P1 can generate elastic force by the load application part 961O, 961P1. , 961P1 can be further alleviated. Thereby, even if the load generation parts 944, 944P1 repeatedly interfere with the load application parts 961O, 961P1, damage to the load generation parts 944, 944P1 and the load application parts 961O, 961P1 can be further suppressed.

(57th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94P2 that is the same as the 56th embodiment described above, and a distribution member 94P2 that is different from the 56th embodiment described above. A load acting part is provided. The load acting section includes an upper leaf spring 9611P3 and a lower leaf spring 9612P3. These leaf springs 9611P3 and 9612P3 are arranged vertically at a predetermined interval.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94P2 rotates, the load generation section 944P1 interferes with the upper plate spring 9611P3 of the load application section, and the load generation section 944P1 interferes with the lower plate spring 9612P3. The state in which the portion 944 interferes is repeated. In this embodiment, compared to the above-described 56th embodiment and the like that include the same distribution member 94P2, the distribution member 94P2 can be rotated using elastic force with a simpler configuration.

(58th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(A), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generation section 944Q1 protrudes rightward from the rotating shaft 941 in the distribution member 94Q1, and the load application section 961Q1 distributes the distribution. It is generally provided to the right of the member 94Q1.

The load acting section 961Q1 includes an upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1. These leaf springs 9611Q1 and 9612Q1 face each other and are arranged vertically at a predetermined interval.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the protruding direction of the load generating section 944Q1 is different from that of the aforementioned 55th embodiment, and the direction of the leaf springs 9611Q1, 9612Q1 of the load acting section 961Q1 is different. The same effects as the embodiment are achieved.

(59th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the distribution member 94Q2 protrudes rightward from the rotating shaft 941, as in the 58th embodiment described above. It has a generating portion 944Q1, and includes an upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1 with which the load generating portion 944Q1 interferes when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates. In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the distribution member 94Q2 further includes a load generation portion 944Q2 that protrudes leftward from the rotation shaft 941, and an upper plate spring that the load generation portion 944Q2 interferes with when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates. 9611Q2 and a lower plate spring 9612Q2.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment includes the load generating section 944Q1 as in the fifty-eighth embodiment described above, and therefore has the same effects as the fifty-eighth embodiment. Furthermore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generating section 944Q1 and the load generating section 944Q2 protrude in opposite directions, and these load generating sections 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load applying section 961Q1 and the spring 961Q2 at the same timing. do. Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generation parts 944Q1 and 944Q2, but also the impact when the load generation parts 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load application parts 961Q1 and 961Q2 can be reduced. can. Thereby, even if the load generation parts 944Q1, 944Q2 repeatedly interfere with the load application parts 961Q1, 961Q2, damage to the load generation parts 944Q1, 944Q2, the load application part 961Q1, and the spring 961Q2 can be suppressed.

(60th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94Q2 that is the same as the aforementioned 59th embodiment, and a load that is different from that of the aforementioned 59th embodiment. Equipped with an action part. The load acting section includes a left leaf spring 9611Q3 and a right leaf spring 9612Q3. These leaf springs 9611Q3 and 9612Q3 are arranged on the left and right with a predetermined interval therebetween.

In the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates, the load generation section 944Q2 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611Q3 of the load application section, and the load is generated on the right leaf spring 9612Q3. The state in which the portion 944Q1 interferes is repeated. In this embodiment, compared to the above-described 59th embodiment and the like that include the same distribution member 94Q2, the distribution member 94Q2 can be rotated using elastic force with a simpler configuration.

Note that the load generating section may protrude leftward from the rotation shaft, or may protrude from the rotation shaft in a direction other than up, down, left, and right.

(61st to 67th embodiments)

In the above-mentioned 54th to 60th embodiments, the load generating portions of the distribution members 94, 94P1, 94P2, 94Q1, 94Q2 are formed as leaf springs 944, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2 which are elastic bodies. . On the other hand, the sixty-first to sixty-seventh embodiments differ from the foregoing fifty-fourth to sixtieth embodiments in that the distribution member includes a load input section formed as a rigid body.
(61st embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the same load acting section 961O as in the above-mentioned 54th embodiment, and a load acting section 961O that is different from that in the above-mentioned 54th embodiment. The distribution member 94R1 includes an input section 944R1. The load input section 944R1 is a section into which a load for rotating the distribution member 94R1 is input from the load application section 961O, and protrudes downward from the rotation shaft 941. This load input part 944R1 has an arm 9441R1 that protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941, and an interference part 9441R1 that is provided at the end of the arm 9441R1 and interferes with the load application part 961O when the distribution member 94R1 is rotated. It is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the 54th embodiment described above is changed to a load input section 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. This is what I did.

(62nd embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the same load acting section 961P1 as the above-mentioned 55th embodiment, and a load acting section 961P1 that is different from the above-mentioned 55th embodiment. and a distribution member 94R2 having an input section 944R2. The load input section 944R2 is a section into which the load for rotating the distribution member 94R2 is input from the load application section 961P1, and projects upward from the rotation shaft 941. This load input part 944R2 has an arm 9441R2 that projects upward from the rotating shaft 941, and an interference part 9442R2 that is provided at the end of the arm 9441R2 and interferes with the load application part 961P1 when the distribution member 94R2 is rotated. It is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944P1 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the 55th embodiment described above is changed to a load input section 944R2 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. This is what I did.

(63rd embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the same load acting parts 961O, 961P1 as in the above-mentioned 56th embodiment, and the same as in the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. A distribution member 94R3 having different load input sections 944R1 and 944R2 is provided. The load input sections 944R1 and 944R2 include the same load input section 944R1 as in the sixty-first embodiment described above, and the same load input section 944R2 as in the sixty-second embodiment described above. That is, the distribution device 92 of this embodiment replaces the load generation portions 944, 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the 56th embodiment described above with a load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. , 944R2.

(64th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109(D) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(D), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting parts (plate springs 9611P3, 9612P3) as in the above-mentioned 57th embodiment, and the above-mentioned 63rd embodiment. It includes the same distribution member 94R3 as the embodiment. That is, the distribution device 92 of this embodiment replaces the load generation portions 944, 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the 57th embodiment described above with a load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. , 944R2.

(65th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the same load acting section 961Q1 as in the above-mentioned 58th embodiment, and a load acting section 961Q1 that is different from that in the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. The distribution member 94S1 includes an input section 944S1. The load input section 944S1 is a section into which the load for rotating the distribution member 94S1 is input from the load application section 961Q1, and protrudes to the right from the rotation shaft 941. This load input section 944S1 includes an arm 9441S1 that protrudes to the right from the rotating shaft 941, and an interference section 9442S1 that is provided at the end of the arm 9441S1 and interferes with the load application section 961Q1 when the distribution member 94S1 rotates. , is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of this embodiment, the load generation section 944Q1 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 58th embodiment described above is changed to a load input section 944S1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. This is what I did.

(66th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting parts (plate springs 9611Q1, 9612Q1, 9611Q2, 9612Q2) as in the 59th embodiment described above, and The distribution member 94S2 has load input sections 944S1 and 944S2 different from the fifty-ninth embodiment. The load input sections 944S1 and 944S2 include the same load input section 944S1 as in the sixty-fifth embodiment described above, and a load input section 944S2 protruding leftward from the rotating shaft 941. That is, the distribution device 92 of this embodiment replaces the load generation portions 944Q1, 944Q2 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 59th embodiment described above with a load input portion 944S1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. , 944S2.

(67th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has the same load acting parts (plate springs 9611Q3, 9612Q3) as in the above-mentioned 60th embodiment, and the above-mentioned 66th embodiment. It includes the same distribution member 94S2 as the embodiment. That is, the distribution device 92 of this embodiment replaces the load generation portions 944Q2 and 944Q3 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the sixtieth embodiment described above with a load input portion 944S1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. , 944S2.

Note that the load input section may protrude leftward from the rotation axis, or may protrude from the rotation axis in a direction other than up, down, left, or right.

(68th embodiment)
In the above-mentioned 61st embodiment, a case has been described in which the distribution member 94I has the load input section 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input section 944R1 has the arm 9441R1 and the interference section 9441R2. In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the 61st embodiment described above in that the load input section is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, but the load generation section is formed as a cam. This is different from the 61st embodiment.

Here, FIG. 111(A) and FIG. 111(B) are diagrams showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting section 961O as the above-mentioned 61st embodiment, and the above-mentioned 61st embodiment. The distribution member 94T is different from the embodiment. The distribution member 94T includes a load input section 944T having an inverted teardrop shape when viewed from the front. The load input section 944T has a rotating shaft 941 fixed thereto, and rotates integrally with the rotation of the rotating shaft 941. This load input section 944T has a left cam surface 9441T and a right cam surface 9442T.

The left cam surface 9441T is in contact with the left leaf spring 9611O of the load application section 961O, and elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O when the distribution member 94T rotates clockwise. The right cam surface 9442T is in contact with the right leaf spring 9612O of the load application section 961O, and elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates counterclockwise.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94T rotates clockwise, the left cam surface 9441T elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O, thereby generating an elastic force in the left leaf spring 9611O. The force rotates the distribution member 94T in the counterclockwise direction. When the distribution member 94T rotates counterclockwise, the right cam surface 9442T elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O, generating elastic force in the right leaf spring 9612O, and the elastic force of the right leaf spring 9612O causes distribution. Member 94T is rotated in a clockwise direction. As a result, the distribution member 94T is rotated repeatedly in one direction (for example, clockwise direction) and in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) due to the elastic force of the plate springs 9611O and 9612O that are generated alternately. Rotate.

Note that the cam surfaces 9441T, 9442T only need to be able to elastically deform the leaf springs 9611O, 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates, and even if the cam surfaces 9441T, 9442T and the leaf springs 9611O, 9612O are spaced apart. good.

(69th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 111(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94T in which the same load input section 944T as in the 68th embodiment described above is formed as a cam, and a distribution member 94T formed as a cam. The load application section 961U has a configuration different from that of the sixty-eighth embodiment. The load application section 961U includes a left leaf spring 9611U and a right leaf spring 9612U whose tips are rounded into a cylindrical shape. Note that the left leaf spring 9611U and the right leaf spring 9612U may be formed of rod-shaped members, and in this case, the tip portions are formed in a ring shape.

(70th embodiment)
In the foregoing thirty-ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the load generating section 944 of the distribution member 94 is formed as a leaf spring. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment in that the load generating section is formed by two spiral springs.

Here, FIG. 112(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. 112(B) and 112(C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112(A). FIG. 113(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A8-A8 in FIG. 112(A). FIG. 113(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A9-A9 in FIG. 112(A).

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94V having a load generating section 944V, and rotation regulating sections 947V and 948V.

The load generating section 944V includes a right-handed spiral spring 945V fixed to the rotating shaft 941, and a left-handed spiral spring 946V fixed to the rear of the rotating shaft 941 than the right-handed spiral spring 945V.

The right-handed spiral spring 945V has a winding portion 9451V, an input piece 9452V, and a fixed piece 9453V. The winding portion 9451V is a portion that generates elastic force, and is wound clockwise along the circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9452V is a part to which a load is input by interfering with the left rotation regulating part 947V, and extends to the left from the outer end of the winding part 9451V. The fixing piece 9453V is a part that fixes the right-handed spiral spring 945V to the rotating shaft 941, and extends downward from the inner end of the winding portion 9451V. By embedding this fixed piece 9453V in the rotating shaft 941, the right-handed spiral spring 945V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941.

The left-handed spiral spring 946V has a winding portion 9461V, an input piece 9462V, and a fixed piece 9463V. The winding portion 9461V is a portion that generates elastic force, and is wound counterclockwise along the circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462V is a part to which a load is input by interfering with the right rotation regulating part 948V, and extends to the right from the outer end of the winding part 9461V. The fixing piece 9463V is a portion that fixes the left-handed spiral spring 946V to the rotating shaft 941, and extends downward from the inner end of the winding portion 9461V. By embedding this fixed piece 9463V in the rotating shaft 941, the left-handed spiral spring 946V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941.

The rotation regulating parts 947V and 948V include a left rotation regulating part 947V and a right rotation regulating part 948V.

The left-handed rotation regulating section 947V inputs a load to the right-handed spiral spring 945V via the input piece 9452V by regulating the rotation of the right-handed spiral spring 945V when the distribution member 94V rotates. The left rotation regulating portion 947V has a right-opening U-shape in which a pair of regulating pieces 9472V and 9473V extend rightward from the upper and lower edges of the base portion 9471V. In this left rotation regulating portion 947V, when the distributing member 94V rotates clockwise, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulating piece 9472V, thereby regulating the clockwise rotation of the distributing member 94V. At this time, since the fixed piece 9453V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, the right-handed spiral spring 945V receives a load in the unfolding direction opposite to the winding direction to the winding portion 9451V. The portion 9451V generates an elastic force in the winding direction. Due to the elastic force of the winding portion 9451V in the winding direction, the distribution member 94V, whose rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, rotates in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates counterclockwise, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulation piece 9473V, thereby restricting the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, a load in the winding direction is input to the winding part 9451V, so that the winding part 9451V generates an elastic force in the unfolding direction. Due to the elastic force in the unfolding direction of the winding portion 9451V, the distribution member 94V, whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, rotates in the clockwise direction.

On the other hand, the right-handed rotation regulating section 948V inputs a load to the left-handed spiral spring 946V via the input piece 9462V by regulating the rotation of the left-handed spiral spring 946V when the distribution member 94V rotates. The right rotation regulating portion 948V has a left-opening U-shape in which a pair of regulating pieces 9482V and 9483V extend leftward from the upper and lower edges of the base portion 9481V. In this clockwise rotation regulating portion 948V, when the distributing member 94V rotates clockwise, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulating piece 9483V, thereby regulating the clockwise rotation of the distributing member 94V. At this time, since the fixed piece 9463V of the left-handed spiral spring 946V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, a load in the winding direction is input to the winding part 9461V, so that the winding part 9461V exerts an elastic force in the deployment direction. occurs. Due to the elastic force of the winding portion 9461V in the unfolding direction, the distribution member 94V, whose rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, rotates in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates counterclockwise, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulation piece 9462V, thereby restricting the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, a load in the unfolding direction is input to the winding part 9461V, so that the winding part 9461V generates an elastic force in the winding direction. Due to the elastic force in the winding direction of the winding portion 9461V, the distribution member 94V, whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, rotates in the clockwise direction.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94V is rotated clockwise, an elastic force in the winding direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V, and an elastic force in the winding direction is generated in the winding portion 9461V of the left-handed spiral spring 946V. An elastic force is generated in the direction of expansion. Therefore, when the distribution member 94V is rotated clockwise, it is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force generated in the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94V is rotated counterclockwise, an elastic force in the deployment direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-hand spiral spring 945V, and the winding portion of the left-hand spiral spring 946V An elastic force in the winding direction is generated at 9461V. Therefore, when the distribution member 94V is rotated counterclockwise, it is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated in the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V. In this way, also in this embodiment, the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94V rotates allows the distribution member 94V to rotate in one direction (for example, clockwise) and the distribution member 94V in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise). It is possible to realize a rotation operation in which rotations (clockwise direction) are repeated alternately.

(71st embodiment)
In the aforementioned seventieth embodiment, the case where the load generating section 944V of the distribution member 94V is a spiral spring has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment is similar to the 70th embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated using the elastic force generated by the spiral spring, but the spiral spring is used as the load acting section. This embodiment differs from the aforementioned seventieth embodiment in that the present embodiment is different from the seventieth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94W and a load application section 945W.

The distribution member 94W has an interference portion 944W formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body in place of the load generating portion 944 which is a leaf spring in the distribution member 94 of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. The interference portion 944W is a portion that interferes with a right-handed spiral spring 946W or a left-handed spiral spring 947W of a load application portion 945W, which will be described later, when the distribution member 94W rotates, and is a plate-shaped portion extending downward from the rotating shaft 941. be.

The load application section 945W includes a right-handed spiral spring 946W, a left-handed spiral spring 947W, and a support section 948W.

The right-handed spiral spring 946W has a winding portion 9461W, an input piece 9462W, and a fixed piece 9463W. The winding portion 9461W is a portion that generates elastic force, and is wound to the right when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462W is a part into which a load is input by interference with the interference part 944W of the distribution member 94W, and extends upward from the outer end of the winding part 9461W. The fixing piece 9463W is a portion that fixes the right-handed spiral spring 946W to the support portion 948W, and extends to the right from the inner end of the winding portion 9461W.

The left-handed spiral spring 947W has a winding portion 9471W, an input piece 9472W, and a fixed piece 9473W. The winding portion 9471W is a portion that generates elastic force, and is left-handed when viewed from the front. The input piece 9472W is a part into which a load is input by interference with the interference part 944W of the distribution member 94W, and extends upward from the outer end of the winding part 9471W. The fixing piece 9472W is a portion that fixes the left-handed spiral spring 947W to the support portion 948W, and extends to the left from the inner end of the winding portion 9471W.

The support portion 948W has a pair of support arms 9482W and 9483W extending upward from the base 9481W. Support arms 9482W, 9483W support spiral springs 946W, 947W. Specifically, the centers of the winding portions 9461W, 9471W are inserted into the fixed shafts 9484W, 9485W extending in the front and back direction from the support arms 9482W, 9483W, and the fixed pieces 9463W, 9473W are embedded in the fixed shafts 9484W, 9485W. Thus, the spiral springs 946W, 947W are supported by the support arms 9482W, 9483W.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated clockwise, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9462W of the right-handed spiral spring 946W. As a result, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, the input piece 9462W moves to the left, so that a load acts on the winding portion 9461W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, an elastic force is generated in the unfolding direction at the winding portion 9461W, and the winding portion 9461W is expanded by this elastic force, so that the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W is transferred from the input piece 9462W to the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W. A load is input to rotate the distribution member 94W in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94W is rotated counterclockwise, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9472W of the left-handed spiral spring 947W. As a result, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, the input piece 9472W moves to the right, so that a load acts on the winding portion 9471W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, an elastic force is generated in the unfolding direction at the winding portion 9471W, and the winding portion 9471W is expanded by this elastic force, so that the input piece 9472W is connected to the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W. On the other hand, a load that rotates the distribution member 94W in a clockwise direction is input. In this way, also in this embodiment, the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94W rotates allows the distribution member 94W to rotate in one direction (for example, clockwise) and the distribution member 94W to rotate in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise). It is possible to realize a rotation operation in which rotations (clockwise direction) are repeated alternately.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, the spiral springs 946W and 947W are wound, and the elastic force in the deployment direction is used to rotate the distribution member. Although the distribution member 94W is rotated in the opposite direction, the distribution member 94W may be rotated in the opposite direction using the elastic force in the winding direction generated by the spiral springs 946W and 947W being expanded.

<72nd embodiment>
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 by the elastic force generated in the load generation section 944. We have explained the case of rotating the . On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned 39th embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by a load that is continuously input from the outside, regardless of the distribution of game balls.

Here, FIG. 115(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. 115(B), FIG. 116(A), and FIG. 116(B) are diagrams showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115(A).

As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a distribution member 94X and a drive mechanism 97X.

The distribution member 94X includes a rotation shaft 941, a left ball receiving guide piece 942L, a right ball receiving guiding piece 942R, and a left load input section 944X and a right load input section 945X. The left load input section 944X is a plate-shaped rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and protrudes leftward from the rotating shaft 941. The right load input section 945X is a plate-shaped rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and protrudes rightward from the rotating shaft 941. Note that the left load input section 944X and the right load input section 945X may be formed as elastic bodies such as leaf springs.

The drive mechanism 97X includes a left rotary body 971X, a right rotary body 972X, a motor 973X that applies rotational force to rotate the rotary bodies 971X and 972X, and a motor 973X that transmits the rotational force applied from the motor 973X to the rotary bodies 971X and 972X. It includes a plurality of transmission gears 974X to 977X (four in this embodiment) that mesh with each other. Note that a DC motor, a stepping motor, etc. can be used as the motor 973X. Further, in place of the motor 973X, other drive sources such as a solenoid can also be used. Preferably, the plurality of transmission gears 974X to 977X have the same gear diameter and gear ratio.

The left rotating body 971X is rotated clockwise by the rotational force input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gear 974X. This left rotating body 971X includes a gear 9712X integrated with the rotating shaft 9711X, and a plurality of interference plates 9713X (three in this embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9711X at equal angular intervals. Gear 9712X is a portion to which rotational force from motor 973X is input via transmission gears 974X and 975X. The plurality of interference plates 9713X are portions that interfere with the left load input section 944X of the distribution member 94X when the left rotating body 971X is rotated clockwise, and are formed of elastically deformable leaf springs.

The right rotating body 972X is rotated counterclockwise by the rotational force input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gears 976X and 977X. The right rotating body 972X includes a gear 9722X integrated with the rotating shaft 9721X, and a plurality of interference plates 9723X (three in this embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9721X at equal angular intervals. Gear 9722X is a portion to which rotational force from motor 973X is input via transmission gears 975X to 977X. The plurality of interference plates 9723X are portions that interfere with the right load input section 945X of the distribution member 94X when the right rotating body 972X is rotated counterclockwise, and are formed of elastically deformable leaf springs. . Note that the plurality of interference plates 9723X of the right rotating body 972X are arranged with a phase shift of 60° from the plurality of interference plates 9713X of the left rotating body 971X. Further, the rotational speed of the right rotating body 972X is the same as the rotational speed of the left rotating body 971X.

The left rotating body 971X rotates clockwise with the phase of the multiple interference pieces 9723X of the right rotating body 972X being shifted by 60 degrees with respect to the multiple interference pieces 9713X of the left rotating body 971X shown in FIG. 115(A). When the right rotating body 972X rotates counterclockwise, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X interferes with the left load input section 944X of the distribution member 94X, as shown in FIG. 115(B). As a result, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the clockwise rotational force of the left rotating body 971X is input to the left load input section 944X of the distribution member 94X via the interference piece 9713X, and the distribution member 94X rotated in a counterclockwise direction. Further, when the distribution member 94X is rotated by the rotational force of the left rotation body 971X, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotation body 971X is elastically deformed, and the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X is rotated by the rotation force of the left rotation body 971X. Interferes with interference piece 9723X. As a result, the counterclockwise rotational force of the right rotating body 972X is input to the right load input section 945X of the distribution member 94X via the interference piece 9723X. At this time, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the elastically deformed interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X separates from the left load input section 944X of the distribution member 94X. Therefore, the distribution member 94X is rotated clockwise by the counterclockwise rotational force of the right rotating body 972X.

On the other hand, although the drawing is omitted, when the distribution member 94X is rotated clockwise by the rotational force of the right rotation body 972X, the left load input section 944X of the distribution member 94X is transferred to the interference piece of the left rotation body 971X. While interfering with 9713X, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotating body 972X is elastically deformed. Thereafter, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotary body 972X separates from the right load input section 945X of the distribution member 94X, and as explained above, the distribution member 94X is rotated counterclockwise by the left rotation body 971X. be done. In this way, the distribution member 94X is rotated by being alternately rotated counterclockwise and clockwise by the left rotating body 971X and the right rotating body 972X.

As described above, in this embodiment, the drive mechanism 97X rotates the left rotary body 971X in the clockwise direction and rotates the right rotary body 972X in the counterclockwise direction, regardless of the distribution of the game balls 99 by the distribution member 94X. By rotating the distribution member 94X, the distribution member 94X is rotated alternately in a counterclockwise direction and a clockwise direction. Therefore, also in this embodiment, the player can launch the game balls 99 at a timing when the game balls 99 are likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the distribution member 94X can be rotated by rotating the motor 973X in the same direction at a constant speed, so that the motor 973X can be easily controlled.

<73rd embodiment>
In the aforementioned 72nd embodiment, the drive mechanism 97X rotates the left rotary body 971X in the clockwise direction and rotates the right rotary body 972X in the counterclockwise direction, regardless of the distribution of the game balls 99 by the distribution member 94X. The case where the distribution member 94X is rotated by rotating the distribution member 94X has been described. In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the 72nd embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated by a drive mechanism, but a rotational force is applied to the rotation axis of the distribution member from outside the distribution member. This embodiment differs from the aforementioned 72nd embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by input.

Here, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a distribution member 94Y and a drive mechanism 97Y.

The distribution member 94Y includes a rotation shaft 941, a left ball receiving guiding piece 942L, a right ball receiving guiding piece 942R, and a load input section 944Y. The load input section 944Y is a bevel gear integrated with the rear end of the rotating shaft 941, and rotates together with the rotating shaft 941.

The drive mechanism 97Y inputs a rotational force for rotating the distribution member 94Y to the load input section 944Y. This drive mechanism 97Y includes a rotating shaft 971Y rotated by a motor 970Y, and a bevel gear 972Y integrally provided at an end of the rotating shaft 971Y. Note that a DC motor, a stepping motor, etc. can be used as the motor 970Y. Further, other drive sources such as a solenoid may be used in place of the motor 970Y. The bevel gear 972Y rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 971Y when the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated by the motor 970Y. A load input section 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is meshed with this bevel gear 972Y. Therefore, when the rotary shaft 971Y is rotated by the rotational force from the motor 970Y, the load input portion 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is rotated by the rotation of the bevel gear 972Y accompanying the rotation of the rotary shaft 971Y. As a result, the rotation shaft 941 of the distribution member 94Y is rotated, thereby rotating the entire distribution member 94Y. Note that the operation of the motor 970Y is controlled by the MPU 41. That is, by controlling the drive source by the MPU 41, the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated in the forward or reverse direction, and accordingly, the distribution member 94Y is rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

By the way, in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 was controlled according to the attitude (rotation angle) of the distribution member 94 based on the output voltage of the detection unit 95. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment in that the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 is controlled according to the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y.

Here, FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of the synchronous lamp 923. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, the MPU 41 performs the distribution by rotating the distribution member 94Y alternately clockwise (rightward) and counterclockwise (leftward) by a predetermined rotation angle. Rotate the member 94Y. Further, in this embodiment, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate counterclockwise (leftward), and the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate clockwise (rightward). The light will be turned off at the same time. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise when the synchronization lamp 923 is lit, and that the distribution member 94Y is rotating clockwise when the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off. I can recognize that. Therefore, the player launches the game ball 99 at a time when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 using the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y, which is determined by the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923, as a guide. becomes possible. For example, if the timing at which the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is set to the timing at which the game balls 99 are launched so that the game balls 99 are easily sorted into the second passage 922, the timing at which the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is set to the timing at which the game balls 99 are launched. By performing the launch, the game ball 99 can be efficiently passed through the second passage 922. In this case, the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 will notify the timing of launching the game balls 99 at which the game balls 99 are likely to be distributed to the second passage 922. In addition, on the contrary, even if the rotation pattern of the distribution member 94Y is set so that the turning off of the synchronization lamp 923 signals the launching timing of the game balls 99 at which the game balls 99 are likely to be distributed to the second passage 922. Often, the synchronization lamp 923 may be turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate clockwise (rightward).

Note that the unit rotation period Ts (see FIG. 118) of the distribution member 94Y is a positive integer multiple (for example, 1 times to 3 times, preferably 1 times or 2 times) or a value close to it (for example, within the range of ±15% of multiples of positive integers, preferably within the range of ±10% of multiples of positive integers, more preferably within multiples of positive integers) (within a range of ±5%). For example, when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds, the unit rotation period Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds. In this way, since the unit rotation period Ts is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable state) and the game balls can be easily distributed to the second passage 922. This makes it easier to link the firing timing of 99. Furthermore, if the timing of firing the game balls 99 and the timing at which they are distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be made to match, then the game balls can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop shot. It is also possible to do so.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 119, the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment includes sensor detection processing (step S1001), updating processing of random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 (step S1002), as in the first embodiment described above. ), updating processing of counters C1 to C4 (step S1003), starting winning processing (step S1004), firing control processing (step S1005), and through gate processing (step S1006) are executed. In the main timer interrupt process of this embodiment, a distribution member control process (step S3601) and a synchronous lamp control process (step S3602) are further executed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the through gate process, when passage of the game ball 99 through the through gate 319' is detected (Yes in step S1201 in FIG. 16), the number of game balls is counted. This count of the number of game balls is referred to when setting the left rotation time in step S3707 of the distribution member control process described later.

[Distribution member control processing]
Here, FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 controls the output of the motor 972Y in the drive mechanism 97Y, thereby controlling the rotation of the rotary shaft 971Y in the forward direction or the reverse direction. As a result, the right rotation (clockwise rotation) and left rotation (counterclockwise rotation) of the distribution member 94Y are controlled, and the rotational operation of the distribution member 94Y is controlled.

<Step S3701>
In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the clockwise rotation flag is set on (step S3701). The clockwise rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated clockwise, and is set to ON in step S3714, which will be described later. If the clockwise rotation flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3702, and if the clockwise rotation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the process moves to step S3702. The process moves to S3709.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
In step S3702, the MPU 41 determines whether the clockwise rotation time set in step S3712, which will be described later, has elapsed, that is, whether it is the timing to change the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation. do. If the clockwise rotation time has elapsed (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the clockwise rotation flag to OFF (step S3703), and ends the clockwise rotation time measurement (step S3704). Note that if the clockwise rotation time has not elapsed (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 ends the distribution member control process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines the left rotation time and sets the determined left rotation time. The left rotation time is determined depending on the distribution frequency or distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922, such as a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), a standard time (for example, 1 second), and a long time (for example, 1 second). .5 seconds), the left rotation time is determined. For example, the standard counterclockwise rotation time is such that the number of game balls 99 in the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is approximately 1:1 (for example, in the range of 0.4:0.6 to 0.6:0.4). It is selected when the allocation ratio to the first passage 921 is low and the allocation ratio to the second passage 922 is high for a short time, and the allocation ratio to the first passage 921 is high and the allocation ratio to the second passage 922 is high for a long time. This is selected when the distribution ratio for the two passages 922 is low.

Specifically, the MPU 41 first determines that the number of game balls counted when the passage of the game ball 99 through the through gate 319' is detected (Yes in step S1201 in FIG. 16) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.), whether it is at least the first threshold or not, and if it is not at least the first threshold, it is at or below the second threshold, which is set to a smaller value than the first threshold. Determine whether or not. The first threshold value is, for example, a value at which the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.4:0.6 or more, that is, the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is higher than that of the first passage 921. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. The second threshold value is, for example, a value at which the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.6:0.4 or less, that is, the distribution ratio of the first passage 921 is equal to that of the second passage 922. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. In other words, when the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high, a short time is selected as the counterclockwise rotation time to make it difficult for the game balls 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922, while the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high. In this case, by selecting a short time as the left rotation time, it is possible to make it easier to distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922, and to make it possible to maintain a constant distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. Become. As a result, when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, the player 99 can be relieved, and when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second passage 922. Since a higher level of skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the gameplay can be improved. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 that can adjust the difficulty level of firing the game balls 99 at the timing when the game balls 99 are distributed to the second passage 922 according to the skill of the player. As a result, while it is possible to reduce unfairness for players with low skill, for players with high skill, the difficulty level of the timing of firing the game balls 99 in order to distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 can be reduced. It can provide even more enhanced gameplay. Note that the predetermined time for determining whether it is greater than or equal to the first threshold value or less than or equal to the second threshold value is the time since the left rotation time was previously set, and similarly passes through the second passage 922. The count number of the game ball is also the count number since the left rotation time was set last time.

In this embodiment, the left rotation time is selected from three stages: short time, standard time, and long time, but the left rotation time is selected from two stages: short time and standard time, and two stages: standard time and long time. Of course, the time may be selected from four or more stages. Further, in the present embodiment, the clockwise rotation time, which will be described later, is a fixed value (one step), but the clockwise rotation time may be selected from a plurality of times. In this case, the left rotation time may be a fixed value (one step) or may be selected from multiple steps. Furthermore, instead of adjusting the left rotation time or the right rotation time, the distributing member 94Y is stopped for a certain period of time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr, and the stopping time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr is By adjusting the , a state where the game balls 99 are more easily distributed to the second passage 922 than the first passage 921 or a state where the game balls 99 are more easily distributed to the first passage 921 than the second passage 922 is realized. You may. For example, by increasing the stopping time of the distributing member 94Y at the right switching point Pr compared to the stopping time of the distributing member 94Y at the left switching point Pl, it is possible to The game balls 99 can be easily sorted.

Further, in this embodiment, the left rotation time is determined based on the number of game balls passing through the through gate 319', that is, based on the number of game balls passing through the second passage 922, but only the second passage 922 Instead, a detection means for detecting passage of game balls 99 is provided near the introduction port 920 and in the first passage 921, and the ratio of game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is accurately grasped. The counterclockwise rotation time may be determined above. In this way, the player can temporarily launch the game ball 99 to the left side area of the game board 31 or stop the game ball 99 from being launched to the right side area of the game board 31. Even when the punching is stopped, the allocation ratio to the second passage 922 can be accurately grasped. This allows the player to take countermeasures against winning.

<Step S3706>
When the left rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from right rotation to left rotation (step S3706). The MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y to the left at a rotation speed corresponding to the left rotation time determined in step S3705 described above. For example, the rotation speed may be a low speed when the left rotation time is long, a standard speed when the left rotation time is the standard time, and a high rotation speed when the left rotation time is short. After preparing the speed, the MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y to the left at a rotation speed corresponding to the left rotation time determined in step S3705 described above.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
When the left rotation of the distribution member 94Y is started, the MPU 41 sets the left rotation flag to ON (step S3707), sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to ON (step S3708), and executes the distribution member control process. finish. Here, the left rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is being rotated to the left. Further, the synchronous lamp lighting flag is referred to in step S3801 of the synchronous lamp control process, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to turn on the synchronous lamp 923.

<Steps S3709 to 3711>
If the clockwise rotation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), that is, if the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise, the MPU 41 determines whether the counterclockwise rotation time set in step S3705 has elapsed; That is, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from left rotation to right rotation (step S3709). If the left rotation time has elapsed (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the left rotation flag to OFF (step S3710), and ends counting the left rotation time (step S3711). Note that if the left rotation time has not elapsed (step S3709: No), the MPU 41 ends the distribution member control process.

<Steps S3712 to S3715>
In step S3712, the MPU 41 determines the clockwise rotation time and sets the determined clockwise rotation time. In this embodiment, the clockwise rotation time is a fixed value and is not determined from multiple stages like the left rotation time, but may be selected from multiple stages as described above. When the right rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from left rotation to right rotation, and starts clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94Y (step S3713). When the right rotation of the distribution member 94Y is started, the MPU 41 sets the right rotation flag to ON (step S3714), sets the synchronization lamp extinguishing flag to ON (step S3715), and controls the distribution member. Finish the process. Here, the clockwise rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated clockwise.

[Synchronized lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the synchronous lamp control process, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 is controlled based on the control state of the distribution member 94Y.

<Step S3801>
In the synchronous lamp control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3801). Here, the synchronous lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a synchronous lamp lighting command to turn on the synchronous lamp 923, and is set to ON in step S3708 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. If the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3802, and if the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the process proceeds to step S3802. The process moves to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3802), sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to OFF (step S3803), and sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to OFF (step S3803). The synchronous lamp control process ends. That is, the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronous lamp 923 in the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation.

Note that the synchronous lamp lighting command in step S3802 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process of FIG. 93. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is rotating counterclockwise by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent area 9251. By checking the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251, the timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passage 922 (the timing when the game balls 99 are likely to enter the second starting port 315) is determined. It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99. When confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent area 9251, the player can more easily insert the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 than by visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94Y. It becomes possible to let the ball enter.

<Steps S3804 to S3806>
If the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the synchronous lamp extinguishing flag is set to ON (step S3804). Here, the synchronous lamp extinguishing flag is a flag for setting a synchronous lamp extinguishing command to extinguish the synchronous lamp 923, and is set to on in step S3715 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. If the synchronous lamp extinguishing flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp extinguishing command to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to turn off the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3805). , sets the synchronous lamp extinguishing flag to OFF (step S3806), and ends the synchronous lamp control process.

Note that the synchronous lamp extinguishing command in step S3805 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns off the light in step S3509 in the command determination process of FIG. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated clockwise by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the translucent area 9251.

As described above, in this embodiment, the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated to the left and right by the drive mechanism 97X. Therefore, in order for the distribution member 94Y to perform regular operations, the timing when the game balls 99 are distributed to the second passage 922 is different from the above-described thirty-eighth embodiment in which the distribution member 94Y is rotated upon receiving the game balls 99. It becomes easier to launch the game ball 99.

Further, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on or off depending on the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y controlled by the MPU 41. That is, the synchronization lamp 923 can be turned on or off based on the control of the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y by the MPU 41 without detecting the attitude of the distribution member 94Y. Therefore, unlike in the case of detecting the attitude of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as the synchronization lamp 923 being turned on due to a malfunction of the detection section, and the manufacturing process is simplified since there is no need to provide a detection section. It is advantageous in terms of production cost as well.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 94Y is rotated to the left at a rotation speed according to the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y, the first passage 921 It becomes possible to maintain a constant distribution ratio between the second passage 922 and the second passage 922. As a result, it is possible to rescue the player 99 when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, and when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second passage 922. Since more advanced skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the gameplay can be improved.

Note that the technical concept of notifying the player of the rotation direction of the distribution member can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by elastic force as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. In this case, the rotation direction of the distribution member is grasped by a detection means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution member.

<74th embodiment>
In the aforementioned 73rd embodiment, the distribution member 94Y is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the outside of the distribution member 94Y, and one synchronous lamp 923 is turned on and off based on the rotation control of the distribution member 94Y. The case where turning off the lights is controlled has been explained. On the other hand, the present embodiment is similar to the aforementioned 73rd embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by inputting a rotational force from outside the distribution member, but the rotation direction of the distribution member is This embodiment differs from the 73rd embodiment described above in that it includes two synchronous lamps that are turned on and off in accordance with the 73rd embodiment.

Here, FIG. 122(A) is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 122(B) is a sectional view showing the internal configuration of the sorting device. As shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the same sorting member 94Y as in the aforementioned 73rd embodiment, and two synchronous lamps. Equipped with 923L and 923R. The distribution member 94Y is alternately rotated by a predetermined rotation angle in the left direction and the right direction by a rotational force applied from a drive source such as a motor, as in the aforementioned 73rd embodiment. The synchronization lamps 923L and 923R include a left synchronization lamp 923L and a right synchronization lamp 923R. The left synchronous lamp 923L and the right synchronous lamp 923R are light sources such as light emitting diodes, for example.

Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of the synchronous lamp. As shown in FIG. 123, the left synchronization lamp 923L is turned on when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the left, and is turned off when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the right. On the other hand, the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned on when the distribution member 94Y is rotating clockwise, and is turned off when the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise. In other words, while the left synchronization lamp 923L is on, the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned off, and conversely, while the right synchronization lamp 923R is on, the left synchronization lamp 923L is turned off. The left synchronization lamp 923L and the right synchronization lamp 923R are turned on alternately depending on the rotation direction of the motor 94Y. Such control of turning on and off the left synchronous lamp 923L and right synchronous lamp 923R is performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are turned on and off according to the left synchronous lamp lighting command and the right synchronous lamp lighting command set by the MPU 41. This is executed by turning on or off the light. Note that the left synchronous lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to left rotation, and the right synchronous lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from left rotation to right rotation. is set to

These synchronization lamps 923L and 923R are provided at locations that do not obstruct visual recognition of the distribution member 94Y. In the example shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B), it is above the first passage 921 or the second passage 922. On the housing 924 of the sorting device 92, a left lighting mark 925L is provided in the front area of the left synchronization lamp 923L, and a right lighting mark 925R is provided in the front area of the right synchronization lamp 923R. The lighting marks 925L, 925R include transparent regions 9251L, 9251R that transmit light, and mask regions 9252L, 9252R that have low light transmittance and do not transmit light or hardly transmit light. The translucent regions 9251L, 9251R are star-shaped transparent or colorless transparent parts, and transmit the light of the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R when the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R are turned on. The outer edges of the mask regions 9252L and 9252R are formed in a circular shape at the periphery of the light-transmitting regions 9251L and 9251R so as to surround the light-transmitting regions 9251L and 9251R. The mask areas 9252L and 9252R make it possible to highlight the light that passes through the translucent areas 9251L and 9251R when the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are turned on, so that the housing 924 is formed so that the distribution member 94Y can be visually recognized. Even when the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R are turned on, it is possible to clearly recognize the lighting of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R. Note that the lighting marks 925L and 925R can be changed in design in the same way as the lighting mark 925 of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above.

By the way, in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, when the distribution member 94Y is in a state where the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, or when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922. The synchronization lamp 923 was turned on when it was time for the game ball 99 to be fired. However, it is assumed that some players do not understand that the synchronization lamp 923 is the timing when the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the left synchronization lamp 923L lights up when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the left, while the right synchronization lamp 923R lights up when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the right. do. In this manner, in this embodiment, the lighting timing of the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R is synchronized with the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timing of the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R. This makes it easier to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guide in order to search for the launch timing of the game balls 99 at which the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92.

[Distribution member control processing]
Here, FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution member control process of this embodiment is basically the same as the distribution member control process of the aforementioned 72nd embodiment. Specifically, when the clockwise rotation flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), steps S3702 to S3703 are executed similarly to the aforementioned 73rd embodiment, and the clockwise rotation flag is set to off. (step S3701: No), steps S3709 to S3714 are executed in the same manner as in the 74th embodiment described above. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to clockwise rotation and the counterclockwise rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3706 and S3707), a command is provided to turn on the left synchronization lamp 923L. The left synchronization lamp lighting flag for setting is set on (step S3901). In addition, in this embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation and the clockwise rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3713 and S3714), a command is provided to turn on the right synchronization lamp 923R. The right synchronization lamp lighting flag for setting is set on (step S3902).
They differ in some respects.

[Synchronized lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the synchronous lamp control process, a command is set for causing the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to turn on and off the left synchronous lamp 923L and the right synchronous lamp 923R.

<Step S4001>
In the synchronous lamp control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S4001). Here, the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a left synchronous lamp lighting command to turn on the left synchronous lamp 923L, and is set to ON in step S3901 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. If the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4002, and if the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No). , the process moves to step S4004.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a left synchronous lamp lighting command (step S4002) and sets the left synchronous lamp lighting flag to OFF (step S4003). ), the synchronous lamp control process ends. That is, the MPU 41 sets a left synchronization lamp lighting command for causing the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to light the left synchronization lamp 923L when the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
If the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the right synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4004). Here, the right synchronous lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a right synchronous lamp lighting command to turn on the right synchronous lamp 923R, and is set to ON in step S3902 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. When the right synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a right synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the right synchronization lamp 923R in the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5, and also ( Step S4005), the right synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4006), and the synchronous lamp control process ends.

Note that the left synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4002 and the left synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4005 are sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Ru. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 controls lighting and extinction of the left synchronization lamp 923L and controls lighting and extinction of the right synchronization lamp 923R in the command determination process of FIG. 126, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the left synchronization lamp 923L is lit in the translucent area 9251L and the right synchronization lamp 923R is lit in the translucent area 9251R, and the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is moved to the left. You can recognize whether it is rotating or clockwise. Then, by checking that the left synchronization lamp 923L or right synchronization lamp 923R is lit in the translucent areas 9251L and 9251R, the timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 (the game balls are placed in the second starting port 315) is determined. It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the ball 99 is likely to be hit. When confirming the lighting of the left synchronization lamp 923L or right synchronization lamp 923R in the translucent areas 9251L, 9251R, the player can more easily move the second It becomes possible to enter the game ball 99 into the starting port 315.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 25. Similar to the command determination process of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the command determination process of this embodiment executes the processes of steps S2003 to S2005 when a variable pattern command is received (Yes in steps S2001 and S2002). . In addition, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the left synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronous lamp control process is received (step S4101: Yes), the processes of steps S4102 and S4103 are executed, and the synchronization When the right synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the lamp control process is received (step S4104: Yes), the processes of steps S4105 and S4105 are executed.

<Steps S4101 to S4003>
In step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether the left synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronous lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the left synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4101: Yes), it lights the left synchronization lamp 923L (step S4102) and turns off the right synchronization lamp 923R (4103). Note that if the MPU 51 has not received the left synchronous lamp lighting command (step S4101: No), the process proceeds to step S4104.

<Steps S4104 to S4006>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the right synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the synchronous lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the right synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4104: Yes), it lights the right synchronization lamp 923R (step S4105) and turns off the left synchronization lamp 923L (4106). Note that if the MPU 51 has not received the right synchronous lamp lighting command (step S4104: No), it executes processing based on other commands (step S2008), and ends the command determination processing.

As described above, this embodiment is based on the common configuration with the aforementioned 73rd embodiment, and produces the same effects as the aforementioned 73rd embodiment. In other words, compared to the above-mentioned 39th embodiment in which the distributing member 94Y rotates upon receipt of the game balls 99 in order to perform regular operations, the game balls are distributed at the timing when the game balls 99 are distributed to the second path 922. 99 becomes easier to launch, and since there is no need to detect the attitude of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as the synchronization lamp 923 being turned on due to malfunction of the detection unit, and there is no need to provide a detection unit. However, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing process, and also in terms of manufacturing cost. In this embodiment, similarly to the aforementioned 73rd embodiment, the distribution member 94Y is rotated at a rotational speed according to the distribution ratio of game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y. By rotating it counterclockwise, the distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to rescue the player 99 when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, and when the distribution ratio of game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the game balls 99 can be distributed to the second passage 922. Since more advanced skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the gameplay can be improved.

In this embodiment, two synchronization lamps (a left synchronization lamp 923L and a right synchronization lamp 923R) are provided, and one of the synchronization lamps (the left synchronization lamp 923L) lights up as the distribution member 94Y rotates to the left, and the other A synchronization lamp (right synchronization lamp 923R) lights up as the distribution member 94Y rotates clockwise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lighting timing of the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R is synchronized with the rotational direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timing of the synchronous lamps 923L, 923R. This makes it easier to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guide in order to search for the launch timing of the game balls 99 at which the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92.

The technical concept of notifying the player of the rotating direction of the distribution member using two lit lamps can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by elastic force as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. In this case, the rotation direction of the distribution member is grasped by a detection means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution member.

<75th to 81st embodiments>
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the electric support member 93 rotates to open and close the second starting port 315, and the game ball released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 enters the second starting port. The case where the support state in which the ball is guided and the non-support state in which the game ball is not guided to the second starting port are switched has been described. On the other hand, in the seventy-fifth to eighty-first embodiments, the configuration and operation of the electric support member are different from those of the thirty-ninth embodiment. However, in the seventy-fifth to eighty-first embodiments, the configuration of the sorting device is the same as that of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, so that the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above are achieved.

(75th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 127(A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including the sorting device, the electric support member, and the second starting port in this embodiment, and FIG. 127(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. be. FIG. 128(A) is a sectional view taken along the line A10-A10 in FIG. 127(A), and FIG. 128(B) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 128(A).

As shown in FIGS. 127(A) and 127(B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and and a different electric support member 93A.

The electric support member 93A prevents the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 from being guided to the second starting port 315, and prevents the game balls 99 from entering the second starting port 315. It is possible to guide the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to the standby position (see FIG. 128(A)) that restricts the balls and the second starting port 315. It is movable in the front-back direction by a drive means such as a solenoid (not shown) between an operating position (see FIG. 128(B)) that allows the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315. This electric support member 93A includes a left guide portion 931A, a right guide portion 932A, and a through hole 933A. The left guide part 931A is a part that guides the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 of the sorting device 92 to the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. . The right guide part 932A is a part that guides the game balls 99 released from the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . The through hole 933A is provided between the left guide part 931A and the right guide part 932A, and allows the game ball 99 guided from the left guide part 931A and the right guide part 932A to move downward when the electric support member 93A is in the operating position. This is the part that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 315 by dropping it into the second starting port 315.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), when the electric support member 93A is in the standby position, it does not protrude from the game board 31, and the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are It is not guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 93A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128(B), when the electric support member 93A is in the operating position, it protrudes from the game board 31, and the electric support member 93A protrudes from the game board 31, allowing the game to be released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. The ball 99 is guided to the through hole 933A by the left guide part 931A and the right guide part 932A of the electric support member 93A, and enters the second starting port 315 by the through hole 933A.

(76th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main parts of the game board including the sorting device, the electric support member, and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129(A), the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. The electric support member 93B is different from the embodiment. Note that this embodiment also differs from the aforementioned thirty-ninth embodiment in that the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922.

The electric support member 93B has a plate shape slightly tilted downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 93B. Specifically, the electric support member 93B is in a standby position (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 129(A) position) and an operating position (position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 129(B)) in which the second starting port 315 is opened to the left of this standby position. That is, the electric support member 93B has two positions: a standby position where the second starting port 315 is closed (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 129(A)), and an operating position where the second starting port 315 is opened (the position shown in FIG. 129(B)). It is possible to operate between the imaginary line position).

When the electric support member 93B is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 93B closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93B is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93B and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93B is in the operating position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 2. The starting port 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(77th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129(B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board including the electric support member in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129(B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the same sorting device 92 as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and a different electric support member 93C from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Equipped with. Although not clearly shown in the drawings, in this embodiment as well, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922, similar to the aforementioned 76th embodiment.

The electric support member 93C has a plate shape that is inclined slightly downward to the left, and when rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 931C from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 93C rotates as shown in FIG. 129 in a plan view. (B) Rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 93C is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 93C is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is positioned directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315 for the second starting. A standby position (solid line position in FIG. 129(B)) in which the port 315 is closed, and an operating position (FIG. 129(B) in which the opening protrudes forward and opens the second starting port 315 at a position adjacent to the right of the second starting port 315). It is possible to move between the position of the imaginary line in B) and That is, the electric support member 93C is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is in a closed state and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 is in an open state.

When the electric support member 93C is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 93C closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93C is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support member 93C is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93C and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93C is in the operating position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 93C opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

Note that the electric support member 93C may be arranged horizontally without being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 93C to promote movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

(78th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting device 92 as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and a different electric support member 93D from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. Note that in this embodiment as well, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922, similar to the aforementioned seventy-sixth embodiment.

The electric support member 93D rotates clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. 130 in the vertical plane along the game board 31 by inputting rotational force to the rotation shaft 931D from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid. be done. Further, the electric support member 93D is rotated in a vertical plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position ( It is movable between the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 130) and the operating position standing up on the right side of the 32nd starting port 315 (position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 130). That is, the electric support member 93D has a standby position (solid line position in FIG. 130) in which the second starting port 315 is closed, and an operation in which it stands up on the right side of the second starting port 315 and opens the second starting port 315. (the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 130). Note that the electric support member 93D is inclined slightly downward to the left in the standby position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 93D. However, the electric support member 93D may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 93D, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. may encourage movement to.

When the electric support member 93D is in the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 93D closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93D is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support member 93D is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93D and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93D is in the standby position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. It is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(79th embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B) are diagrams showing an example of the main parts of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same sorting device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and the same as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. A different electric support member 93E is provided. Although not clearly shown in the drawings, in this embodiment as well, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922, similar to the aforementioned 76th embodiment.

The electric support member 93E is an elliptical plate member when viewed from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined slightly downward to the left. The electric support member 93E has an oval through hole 931E, a closing portion 932E, and a rotating shaft 933E. The through hole 931E has a shorter axis larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough.

The electric support member 93E rotates in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (on a substantially horizontal plane) by inputting rotational force to the rotating shaft 362W from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, as shown in FIG. It is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B). Further, the electric support member 93E is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the closing portion 932E is located directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 932E is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane. 315 (see FIG. 131(A)); and an operating position (see FIG. 131(B)) where the through hole 931E is located directly above the second starting port 315 and opens the second starting port 315. It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 93E is movable between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 is opened.

Note that the shapes of the electric support member 93E and the through hole 931E are not limited to an ellipse, but may be other shapes such as a circle, an oval, or an oblong rectangle. Further, the electric support member 93E may be arranged horizontally, and in this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 93E, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. may encourage movement to.

When the electric support member 93E is in the standby position shown in FIG. The second starting port 315 is closed, and entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93E is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support member 93E is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93E and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93E is in the operating position shown in FIG. When located, the electric support member 93E opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 931E and allows the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(80th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 132(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment, and FIG. 132(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. . As shown in FIGS. 132(A) and 132(B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same sorting device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and the same as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. and a different electric support member 93F. Note that also in this embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922.

The electric support member 93F has a penetrating portion 931F, and is arranged in a state where it is inclined slightly downward to the left. The electric support member 93F is rotatable around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 93F is rotated by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is placed in a standby position (FIG. 132 (C)) and the operating position where the penetrating portion 931F vertically penetrates directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second starting port 315 (see FIG. 132(A)). It is possible to move.

When the electric support member 93F is in the standby position shown in FIG. 132(C), the electric support member 93F closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93F is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93F and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93F is in the operating position shown in FIG. 132(A), the electric support member 93F opens the second starting port 315 and allows the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

Note that the penetrating portion 931F of the electric support member 93F may have a shape in which not only the upper and lower portions but also a portion of the penetrating portion 931F is opened laterally.

(81st embodiment)
Here, FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of the main parts of the game board including the sorting device, the electric support member, and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 133, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same sorting device 92 as in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, and an electric support member different from the electric support member 93 in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. (left and right wing members 932G, 933G).

The electric accessory device 93G is configured as a so-called electric tulip, and is provided in an area directly below the sorting device 35. The electric accessory device 93G has a housing 931G fixed to the game board 31, and rotatable left and right wing members 932G and 933G.

The housing 931G has an upper opening 934G that allows the left and right wing members 932G, 933G to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. This upper opening 934G is a part where the game balls 99 are introduced into the inside of the electric accessory device 93G, and is a region directly below the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 (directly under the introduction port 920). area). That is, the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 934G. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 934G.

The left and right wing members 932G, 933G are rotatable by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back of the game board 31, and the drive means causes the tips of the left and right wing members 932G, 933G to approach each other. A state in which the second starting port 315 is closed (see FIG. 133(A)) and a state in which the tips of the left and right wing members 932G, 933G are separated to open the second starting port 315 (see FIG. 133(B)). can be switched. Note that the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 93 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) is caused by the opening of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G of this embodiment. Correspondingly, returning the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to closing the left and right wing members 932G, 933G of this embodiment.

When the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are close to each other as shown in FIG. The game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922 collides with the side surface of the right wing member 933G and cannot enter the inside of the electric accessory device 93G. That is, in a state where the tips of the left and right wing members 932G, 933G are close to each other, the game ball 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 enters the second starting port 315 because the left and right wing members 932G, 933G are close to each other. Inhibited by 933G. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surfaces of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G passes through the side of the electric accessory device 93G and is ejected from the outlet 317.

On the other hand, in a state where the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are separated as shown in FIG. The game ball 99 that enters the inside of the electric accessory device 93G and is released from the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is picked up by the right wing member 933G and enters the inside of the electric accessory device 93G. As a result, when the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are separated, the electric accessory device 93G determines which of the game balls 99 that have passed through the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92. The ball enters the second starting port 315.

<82nd and 83rd embodiment>
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the distribution device 92 is provided with the distribution member 94 that rotates by rotating clockwise or counterclockwise upon receiving the game ball 99. On the other hand, the sorting devices of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments, as a sorting section, rotate the game balls clockwise or counterclockwise due to the interference of the game balls to move the game balls to the first path or the This embodiment differs from the foregoing thirty-ninth embodiment in that it includes a rotating body that distributes the distribution to either of the two paths.

As shown in FIG. 134(A), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 82nd embodiment, the distribution section has a cylindrical shape that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 94D (rotating body). The roller 94D is arranged directly below the inlet 920 of the sorting device 92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 83rd embodiment, the distribution section is a windmill that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. 94E. The windmill 94E is arranged directly below the inlet 920 of the sorting device 92. In the windmill 94E, a rotating body 941E is fixed to be freely rotatable by a nail 942E (fixing part). The end of the nail 942E is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 942E is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 942E of the wind turbine 94E is capable of plastic change, when the position of the nail 942E deviates from the initial setting position, and furthermore, the position of the rotating body 941E deviates from the initial setting position, the nail 942E is moved to the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 942E.

Further, in the sorting device 92 of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments, since it has the rotating body 941E of the roller 94D and the windmill 94E that freely rotate in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when the game balls 99 interfere, The ratio at which game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. This determines which of the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 the game ball 99 is allocated to when the special figure game state is mode B or mode E, that is, whether the game ball 99 is supported by the electric support member 93. Since the player can enjoy the game while deciding whether or not the ball will enter the second starting port 315, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, when the sorting section is a freely rotatable thing such as a roller 94D or a windmill 94E, the player can control the tendency of sorting between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the rotating body as the sorting section (game It is also possible to read individual differences between machines. As a result, the player can find a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 922 by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 922, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 922. It becomes possible to obtain.

Note that the configuration of the rotating body as the distribution section is not limited to the cylindrical roller 94D shown in FIG. 134(A) or the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E shown in FIG. 134(B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body includes a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a quadrangular prism, a member with a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylinder member or a flat plate-like member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a rotating body having a plurality of wings. It may also be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Furthermore, the rotating bodies such as the cylindrical roller 94D and the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E may be configured to be rotatable in clockwise and counterclockwise directions by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating bodies. . In this case, it is conceivable that the rotational drive of the rotating body is alternately switched between a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction at fixed time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotation direction of the rotating body does not necessarily need to be changed at regular intervals, and the rotation direction may be changed at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game balls 99 are distributed into the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be changed so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 922 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, the rotating body may be configured to be driven so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 922 in mode E than in mode B, and vice versa. In addition, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 920 of the sorting device 92, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 920 is detected by this ball entry sensor, the ball is rotated in the opposite direction to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible to rotate a rotating body.

<84th and 85th embodiment>
The sorting devices of the 84th and 85th embodiments move the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 by using an immovable and non-rotatable sorting part (fixed sorting part), regardless of rotation or rotation. This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the information is distributed to one of the following.

As shown in FIG. 134(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 84th embodiment has a top portion 941F directly below the introduction port 920, and distributes the liquid as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixing portion 94F. A section is formed. In this mountain-shaped fixing part 94F, since the game balls 99 that interfered with the top 941F or the vicinity thereof are distributed to the left and right, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(D), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 85th embodiment, the apex nail 941G (fixed part) is located directly below the introduction port 920, and the apex nail 941G (fixed part) is located in a symmetrical triangle A distribution section made up of nails 94G is formed. In this triangular nail 94G, the game balls 99 that interfered with the apex nail 941G are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. Each of the triangular nails 38F has an end driven into the game board 31, with the end being a fixed end and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Furthermore, the triangular nail 94G is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 94G can be plastically changed, it becomes possible to return the triangular nail 94G to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 94G deviates from the initial setting position. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 94G.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the 84th and 85th embodiments, since the distribution part is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution part such as a mountain-shaped fixed part 94F or a triangular nail 94G, the game ball 99 is The ratio of distribution to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the 82nd embodiment and the 83rd embodiment described above, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode E, the game ball 99 is Since you can enjoy the game while worrying about whether or not the game ball 99 will be distributed to any of the two passages 922, that is, whether the game ball 99 will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 93, the interest in the game will be increased. can be improved. In addition, if the distributing part is a fixed distributing part that is immovable and non-rotatable, such as a mountain-shaped fixed part 94F or a triangular nail 94G, the player can sort the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the fixed distributing part. It is also possible to read the trends (individual differences between gaming machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 to adjust the firing strength (launching stroke) of the game balls, thereby finding a firing stroke that allows the game balls to be easily sorted into the second passage 922. Therefore, it is fun to search for a firing strength that can easily distribute game balls to the second passage 922, or to search for a gaming machine 10 that can easily distribute game balls from a plurality of gaming machines 10 to the second passage 922. It becomes possible to obtain.

The configuration of the distribution section that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing part 94F shown in FIG. 134(C) and the triangular nail 94G shown in FIG. 134(D). However, the design can be changed. For example, the distribution part may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-shaped peak, or it may have four or more square nails (diamond-shaped nails) with the apex nail located directly below the inlet 920. It may be made of nails or one nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 may be biased.

In addition, in the case where the distribution member is rotated by elastic force, an example has been described in which the distribution member is rotated using the rotational force of a motor, etc., but for example, a support extending from the rotation axis of the distribution member By forming a weight part at the tip of the part, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a pendulum movement is performed when the game balls 99 are distributed.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals, etc. may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Furthermore, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
The game machine is characterized in that the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when the distributing section rotates in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path, a rotational force that rotates the distributing section in the second direction is generated. . Therefore, since the sorting section is rotated in the second direction after being rotated in the first direction, it may be in a state where it is possible to sort the game balls into the second path, so the player can Since the club launches the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, it becomes possible to distribute more game balls to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of game balls to the second path is determined not by mere luck or bad luck, but by the level of skill of the player, such as whether or not he or she can hit the game ball at a timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path. Since the amount changes, the interest in the game improves.

[Appendix A2]
The distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction by an elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then the distribution part is rotated in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. rotated in the first direction by a rotational force. That is, the distribution section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the distribution section is rotated in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path, it becomes possible to repeatedly rotate the distribution section using this as an opportunity. As a result, by distributing game balls to the first passage once, the player can obtain multiple timings for distributing game balls to the second passage, so even players with low skill can easily distribute the game balls to the second passage. On the other hand, it becomes easier to launch the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path.

Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation of the distribution part in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after rotation in the first direction. Ru. Therefore, even after distributing game balls to the second passage, the distributing unit may be in a state of distributing game balls to the second passage, so the rotation operation of the distributing unit is triggered by distributing game balls to the second passage. In this case, by launching the game balls at an appropriate timing by stopping the ball or the like, it becomes possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path. This also increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix A4]
The game machine according to appendix A2, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

The gaming machines according to Appendix A3 and Appendix A4 have a simple configuration because the distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction based on the simple principle of using elastic force. This becomes possible.

[Appendix A5]
The distribution unit (94) includes a load generation unit (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2) that generates elastic force for rotation in the second direction when rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

In the game machine according to appendix A5, a situation in which the game balls can be distributed to the second path by the distribution section can be provided by a simple configuration in which the distribution section is provided with a load generation section that generates an elastic force.

[Appendix A6]
The load generating section (944, etc.) generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section (94, etc.) in the first direction when the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix A5, characterized in that the gaming machine generates the game.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A6 has a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distributing section, so that by distributing the game balls to the first passage at once, the player can distribute the game balls to the second passage. You can get multiple timings to allocate.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to appendix A5 or A6, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided protrudingly from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, since the load generating section is provided protruding from the rotating shaft, it is possible to equalize the rotation period of the distribution section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lag between the timing at which game balls are expected to be distributed to the second passage and the timing at which game balls are actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, a so-called "goto action" is performed in which the distribution section is placed in a position where game balls are distributed to the second path due to the load generation section being operated by a malicious player. It can be prevented.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the leaf spring (944, etc.) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generating section (9442I, 9443I) includes a compression coil spring.

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A13]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generating section includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generating section (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the spiral spring (9452V, 9462V) is wound along the circumferential surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A17]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have one end fixed to the rotation shaft (941) and a first spiral spring (9452V) wound in the first direction, and one end fixed to the rotation shaft (941). The gaming machine according to appendix A16, further comprising a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

The gaming machines according to Appendix A9 to Appendix A17 have simple configurations that utilize the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The distribution section can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution section can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution section in the second direction.

[Appendix A18]
The distribution device (92) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.) when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the distribution unit (94, etc.) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.). 94)) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A17, further comprising a rotation regulating means (945, etc.) for regulating rotation of the player (94) in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18, since the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to prevent the distribution section from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generating section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation regulating means, the load generating section can be Appropriate elastic force can be generated. Furthermore, by regulating the rotation of the distributing section by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to equalize the maximum rotation angle of the distributing section, thereby stabilizing the rotation period of the distributing section. becomes possible. This makes it easy for the player to launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to appendix A18, wherein the rotation regulating means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating section and causing the sorting section to take a posture in which game balls are sorted into the second path. .

[Appendix A20]
A load acting part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A19, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to appendix A19 is provided with a load acting section that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section in the second direction by rotation of the distribution section in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting section is provided can also be easily realized.

[Appendix A21]
The load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution portion (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution portion (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix A20, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, when the distribution part is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution part in the first direction is generated in the load application part, so that the distribution part is rotated in the first direction. The ball is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the passage. Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix A21 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix A2.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, characterized in that the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, a so-called "goto action" is performed in which the distribution section is placed in a position where game balls are distributed to the second path due to the load application section being operated by a malicious player. It can be prevented.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting section includes a leaf spring (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A20 to appendix A22, wherein the load acting section includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting section includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting section includes a spiral spring (946W, 947W).

The gaming machines according to Appendix A23 to Appendix A26 have simple configurations that utilize the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The distribution section can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution section can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution section in the second direction.

[Appendix A27]
The game according to any one of appendices A20 to A26, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) further includes a load input section (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.). Machine.

[Appendix A28]
The load input section (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution section (94J, etc.). The gaming machine described in appendix A27.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A27 and A28, the load application section interferes with the load input section, so that the elastic force generated in the load application section is input from the load input section in order to rotate the distribution section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed to generate an elastic force in the load input section that rotates the distribution section. Therefore, in the gaming machines according to Appendix A27 and Appendix A28, the load application section and the load generation section are Since the impact caused by interference can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting part and the load generating part, it is possible to improve the life of the load acting part and the load generating part. In addition, it becomes possible to utilize the elastic force generated by elastic deformation when the load application section and the load generation section interfere with each other to rotate the distribution section. In addition, since the distribution member is in a state where the game balls are distributed to the first aisle during the opening hours of the game parlor, compared to the case where the game balls are passed through the first aisle, for example, there are fewer game balls in the second aisle. If it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass, it is possible to take measures against so-called morning play, which is a situation advantageous for the player when the game parlor opens.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A27 or A28, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided protrudingly from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, since the load input section is provided protruding from the rotating shaft, it is possible to equalize the rotation period of the distribution section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lag between the timing at which game balls are expected to be distributed to the second passage and the timing at which game balls are actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A30]
The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, it is possible that a malicious player manipulates the load input section to cause the distribution section to take a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path, a so-called "goto act". It can be prevented.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to appendix A27, wherein the load input section (944T) has a cam surface (9441T, 9442T) on which the load application section (961O, 961U) slides.

[Appendix A32]
Any one of appendices A1 to A31, characterized in that the distribution unit (94) is capable of distributing game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passage (921) in a stationary state. The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, when the sorting section is in a stationary state, the sorting section is in a posture to distribute game balls to the first path, so when the sorting section is in a stationary state, the sorting device When game balls are introduced into the first passage, the game balls are distributed to the first passage by rotation of the distribution section. Therefore, when game balls introduced into the distribution device are received by the distribution section, the distribution section is prevented from remaining stationary, and game balls can be prevented from clogging the distribution device.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to appendix A32, wherein the sorting section (94) has an eccentric section (943) that takes a posture in which the game balls are easily sorted into the first path (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix A34]
The gaming machine according to appendix A33, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). .

[Appendix A35]
The distribution section (94) includes a first guide section (942L) that guides game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passageway (921), and a first guide section (942L) that further comprising a second guide part (942R) arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the introduction port (920) to guide the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the second passage (922);
In the stationary state, an axis of symmetry between the first guiding part (942L) and the second guiding part (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis. The gaming machine according to appendix A33 or appendix A34.

In the game machines according to appendices A33 to A35, ball clogging in the distributing device can be effectively prevented by a simple configuration in which an eccentric portion is provided in the distributing section, and a countermeasure against wake-up can be taken.

[Appendix A36]
Further comprising a firing control means (41) capable of firing game balls at predetermined intervals (Th),
The distribution unit (94) changes the rotation direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotation direction from the first direction to the second direction is used as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) until reaching the first switching point (P1) again via the second switching point (P2) is a positive integer multiple of the predetermined interval (Th) or approximately positive. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A35, characterized in that the rotation period is an integral multiple (for example, in the range of ±15% of a positive integral multiple of the rotation period).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36, the unit rotation period (Ts) is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval of the game balls (predetermined interval (Th)) or a value close to it, so that the game balls are distributed to the second path. It becomes easier to link the state in which the ball is easily thrown (state in which it can be distributed) and the timing of firing the game ball. Furthermore, if the timing of launching the game balls can be matched with the timing of the distribution of the game balls to the second path of the distribution device, then by performing a stop shot, the game balls can be distributed to the second path with a high probability. is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing at which it is distributed to the second passage of the distribution device, by repeating the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball, there is a high probability that the game ball will be placed in the second passage. It is also possible to allow the balls to be distributed. In addition, when multiple firing intervals of game balls by the firing control means are set, the unit rotation period is a positive integer multiple of the shortest firing interval among the multiple firing intervals, or a value close to it. .

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is within a positive integer multiple of ±15% of the predetermined interval (Th).

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A37 and Appendix A38, even if the unit rotation period (Ts) deviates from a positive integer multiple of the game ball firing interval (Th), even if the deviation is within a predetermined range. For example, the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix A36 can be achieved.

[Appendix A39]
a position indicating section (923) that indicates to the player that the distributing section (94) is in a position where it can distribute game balls to the second passageway (922);
an instruction state that controls the position instruction section (923) and indicates to the player that the distribution section (94) is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path (922); a position indicating unit control means (51) that controls switching between different non-indicating states;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A38, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A39, the position indicating section is controlled by the position indicating section control means, so that the player is informed that the distributing section is in a position where the game balls can be distributed to the second path. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the position instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing to launch the game balls that will make it easier for the game balls to be distributed to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game balls while visually confirming the rotational direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A40]
The position indicating section (923) is a light emitting section (923) that is turned on when the distributing section (94) is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second passageway (922) to enter the indicated state. 923) The gaming machine according to appendix A39.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40, the position indicating section is brought into an indicating state and a non-instructing state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so that the position indicating section is realized by a simple configuration including the light emitting section.

[Appendix A41]
The game according to appendix A40, characterized in that the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting section (925) for making it easier to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting section (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, if the position indicating section is configured to have a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the position indicating section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, which solves the above concern.

[Appendix A42]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting section (94),
The position indicating unit control means (51) controls switching of the position indicating unit (923) between the indicating state and the non-indicating state based on the detection result of the position detecting unit (95). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A39 to appendix A41.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, the position instruction section is switched between an instruction state and a non-instruction state based on the detection result of the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotational position (posture) of the distribution section. state and non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution section is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A39 to A42, wherein the position instruction section (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, since the position indicating section is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the timing at which game balls are likely to be sorted to the second path without taking his eyes off the sorting device. Therefore, while checking the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player moves his/her line of sight widely to see whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device is sorted into the first passage or the second passage. You can check without asking. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball launch at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A44]
a firing instruction section (923) that indicates the firing timing of game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second passageway (922);
Controls the firing instruction unit (923) to control switching between an instruction state indicating that the timing of firing is such that game balls are easily distributed to the second path (922), and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. a firing instruction unit control means (51) to
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A39 to A43, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, the firing instruction section is controlled by the firing instruction section control means, so that the player can be informed that it is the timing for firing the game balls at which the distribution section can distribute the game balls to the second path. be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing of launching the game ball that will easily lead the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A45]
The firing instruction section (923) includes a light emitting section (923) that is turned on to enter the instruction state when the game ball is fired at a timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passageway (922). The gaming machine according to appendix A44, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45, the firing instruction section is brought into an instruction state and a non-instruction state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so the firing instruction section is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting section.

[Appendix A46]
The game according to appendix A45, characterized in that the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting part (925) for making it easy to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting part (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46, if the firing instruction section has a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, so the above concern is resolved.

[Appendix A47]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting section (94),
The firing instruction section control means (51) controls switching of the position instruction section (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result by the position detection means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A44 to appendix A46.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47, the instruction state and non-instruction state of the firing instruction section are switched based on the detection result of the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotational position (posture) of the distributing section. state and non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that it is time for the game balls to be fired at which the distribution section can distribute the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A44 to A47, wherein the firing instruction section (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A48, the firing instruction section is provided in the sorting device, so the player can grasp the firing timing at which the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second path without taking his eyes off the sorting device. . Therefore, while checking the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player moves his/her line of sight widely to see whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device has been sorted into the first aisle or the second aisle. You can check without asking. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball launch at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A49]
a direction indicating section (923, 923L, 923R) indicating the rotation direction of the distribution section (94);
an instruction state that controls the direction instruction section (923, 923L, 923R) and indicates that the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction; and the instruction state. direction indicating unit control means (51) for controlling switching between a non-indicating state and a non-indicating state different from the
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A48, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A49, the rotation direction of the distribution section is notified to the player by controlling the direction instruction section by the direction instruction section control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path, using the instruction state of the direction instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing to launch the game ball that will easily lead the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotational direction and posture of the distribution section. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A50]
The direction indicating section (923, 923L, 923R) is turned on when the distributing section (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction, thereby entering the indicating state. The gaming machine according to appendix A49, characterized in that the gaming machine has a light emitting section (923, 923L, 923R).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A50, the direction instruction section is brought into an instruction state and a non-instruction state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so the direction instruction section is realized by a simple configuration including the light emitting section.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to appendix A50, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting part (925) for making it easier to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting part (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A51, if the direction indicating section is configured to have a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the direction indicating section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, so the above concern is resolved.

[Appendix A52]
The direction indicating section (923L, 923R) is
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51), a first direction indicating section (923L) that is brought into the non-indicating state;
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51), a second direction indicating section (923R) that is brought into the non-indicating state;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A49 to appendix A51, characterized in that the gaming machine includes the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, since the direction instruction section includes two direction instruction sections, the first direction instruction section and the second direction instruction section, the rotation direction of the distribution section can be determined depending on the instruction state and non-indication state of one direction instruction section. It becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution section compared to the case where the rotation direction of the distribution section is grasped. In addition, there is no need to focus on the direction indicated by the direction indicating section and the direction in the non-indicating state, for example, the lighting state of the first direction indicating section and the lighting state of the second direction indicating section. Since the rotational direction of the distribution section can be grasped by focusing only on the instruction state of the two-direction instruction section, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotational direction of the distribution section. This makes it easy to hit the game balls at the timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second passage, so even a player with low skill can hit the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second passage. It becomes possible to improve the probability of being able to launch a .

[Appendix A53]
The sorting device (92) further includes a detection means for detecting the rotational direction of the sorting section (94),
Supplementary note A49, wherein the direction indicating unit control means (51) controls switching of the direction indicating unit (923) between the indicating state and the non-indicating state based on the detection result by the detecting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A52.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, the direction instruction section is switched between an instruction state and a non-instruction state based on the detection result of the detection means, so that the instruction state appropriately reflects the rotational direction (posture) of the distribution section. and a non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, based on the instruction state and non-indication state of the direction instruction section, it becomes possible to launch the game ball at a time when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high level of gameplay.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A49 to A53, characterized in that the direction instruction section (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54, since the direction indicating section is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the rotating direction of the sorting section without taking his/her line of sight away from the sorting device. Therefore, while checking the rotation direction of the sorting part of the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player should check whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device is in the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether you have been sorted without having to move your line of sight. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the timing of the game ball being launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball being launched at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A55]
The gaming machine according to appendices A1 to A54, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, the sorting section is visible from the outside, so the player plays the game by checking the rotational movement of the sorting section and timing the timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passage. Can hit the ball.

[Appendix A56]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A55, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, it becomes possible to enter the gaming ball into the winning opening, and the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening becomes possible. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining whether to move to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a transition judgment to many special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix A57]
A prize opening (314L) into which game balls can enter,
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passing detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball passes through the first passageway (921) and the second passageway (922). The entry prize opening for game balls that have passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) from the first position (standby position) where entry of game balls into the prize opening (315) is restricted. (315), a movable accessory member (93) that moves to a second position (operating position) where ball entry is permitted;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A56, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage are movable accessory members. The member allows the ball to enter the winning hole. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts and allows the game balls to enter the winning opening for the game balls passing through the first passage and the game balls passing through the second passage. Therefore, there is a movable accessory member that restricts and allows the entry of game balls passing through the first passage into the winning opening, and a movable accessory member that restricts and allows the entry of game balls passing through the second passage into the winning opening. Compared to the case where the movable accessory members are provided separately, not only can it be possible to restrict and allow the entry of game balls into the first passage and the second passage into the prize opening with a simpler configuration, but also the movable The control of accessory members also becomes easier.

[Appendix A58]
The movable accessory member (93) is triggered by the first gaming state (mode B) and the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922). The game mode further comprises a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state between a plurality of game states including a second game state (mode B) in which the operation time is longer than the first game state. The gaming machine described in appendix A57.

[Appendix A59]
Compared to the first gaming state, in the second gaming state, when the movable accessory member (93) is actuated, the game ball passing through the first passage (921) 93) The gaming machine according to appendix A58, characterized in that the game machine is easily hit by a ball.

[Appendix A60]
The plurality of gaming states further include a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E),
In the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E), is the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry prize hole (315)? further comprising determining means (41) for determining whether or not;
The gaming state transition means (41) causes the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) when the determination result of the determining means (41) is to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state). ,
Compared to the first gaming state (mode B), the second gaming state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined by the determining means (41) to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state). The gaming machine according to appendix A58 or A59, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machines according to appendix A58 to appendix A60, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and when the movable accessory member is activated, the game ball enters the winning hole. The ease of entering the ball, especially the ease with which the game ball passes through the first passage and enters the winning hole, differs. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the prize opening depends on whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and whether it passes through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide gaming machines with different gaming properties.

[Appendix A61]
The game machine according to any one of appendix A47 to appendix A60, wherein the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is introduced. .

[Appendix A62]
Addendum A61 further includes a guide part (31Y) that guides all of the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92). The game machine described.

In the game machines according to Appendix A61 and Appendix A62, game balls are introduced into the distribution device by hitting the game ball into the right side area of the game board, that is, by performing so-called right-handed hitting. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a gaming feature in which a game ball is entered into a prize opening by using a sorting device in a specific gaming state among a plurality of gaming states.

[Appendix A63]
The movable accessory member (93) is
a first guide part (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passageway (921) toward the entry prize opening (315) at the second position;
a second guide part (932A, 933G) that guides a game ball passing through the second passageway (922) toward the entry prize opening (315) at the second position;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A57 to appendix A62, characterized by having the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A63, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration and has a first guiding part and a second guiding part, so that the game ball in the first passage and the second guiding part are connected to each other. It becomes possible to guide both the game balls and the game balls in the passageway to the winning hole.

[Appendix A64]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guiding part (931A) and the second guiding part (932A), and is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the prize opening (315) at the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix A63, further comprising a through hole (933A) that allows a ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64, in addition to the first guiding part and the second guiding part, a movable accessory member with a simple structure having a through hole allows the game balls in the first passage and the game balls in the second passage to be connected to each other. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the winning hole.

[Appendix A65]
The first guide part (932G) and the second guide part (933G) are
The game balls that are close to each other in the first position and pass through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the prize opening (315) in a closed state enter the prize opening (315). limit the entry of game balls,
In the second position, the game balls are spaced apart from each other and the input prize hole (315) is opened, and the game ball passes through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) to the input prize hole (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A64, which allows the entry of game balls.

In the game machine according to appendix A56, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game in the first passage is controlled by the movable accessory member having a simple configuration having the first guiding part and the second guiding part that can be moved close to each other. It becomes possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second passage to the winning hole.

[Appendix B1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the distribution section (94) can distribute game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passageway (921) in a stationary state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, when the distributing section is in a stationary state, the distributing section is in a posture of distributing game balls to the first path, so when the distributing section is in a stationary state, the distributing device When game balls are introduced into the first passage, the game balls are distributed to the first passage by rotation of the distribution section. Therefore, when game balls introduced into the distribution device are received by the distribution section, the distribution section is prevented from remaining stationary, and game balls can be prevented from clogging the distribution device.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the sorting section (94) has an eccentric section (943) that makes it easy to sort the game balls into the first path (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). .

[Appendix B4]
The distribution section (94) includes a first guide section (942L) that guides game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passageway (921), and a first guide section (942L) that further comprising a second guide part (942R) arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the introduction port (920) to guide the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the second passage (922);
In the stationary state, an axis of symmetry between the first guiding part (942L) and the second guiding part (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis. The gaming machine described in Appendix B2 or B3.

In the gaming machines according to Appendixes B2 to B4, balls clogging in the distribution device can be effectively prevented by a simple configuration in which an eccentric portion is provided in the distribution section.

[Appendix B5]
Supplementary Notes B1 to B4, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, when the distributing section rotates in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path, a rotational force that rotates the distributing section in the second direction is generated. . Therefore, since the sorting section is rotated in the second direction after being rotated in the first direction, it may be in a state where it is possible to sort the game balls into the second path, so the player can Since the club launches the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, it becomes possible to distribute more game balls to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of game balls to the second path is determined not by mere luck or bad luck, but by the level of skill of the player, such as whether or not he or she can hit the game ball at a timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path. Since the amount changes, the interest in the game improves.

[Appendix B6]
According to appendix B5, the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction by an elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then rotated in the second direction in the first direction. rotated in the first direction by a rotational force. That is, the distribution section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the distribution section is rotated in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path, it becomes possible to repeatedly rotate the distribution section using this as an opportunity. As a result, by distributing game balls to the first passage once, the player can obtain multiple timings for distributing game balls to the second passage, so even players with low skill can easily distribute the game balls to the second passage. On the other hand, it becomes easier to launch the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path.

Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation of the distribution part in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after rotation in the first direction. Ru. Therefore, even after distributing game balls to the second passage, the distributing unit may be in a state of distributing game balls to the second passage, so the rotation operation of the distributing unit is triggered by distributing game balls to the second passage. In this case, by launching the game balls at an appropriate timing by stopping the ball or the like, it becomes possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path. This also increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix B7]
The game machine according to appendix B6, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix B8]
The game machine according to appendix B7, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

The gaming machines according to Appendix B7 and Appendix B8 have a simple configuration because the distribution part can be rotated in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction based on the simple principle of using elastic force. This becomes possible.

[Appendix B9]
The distribution unit (94) includes a load generation unit (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2) that generates elastic force for rotation in the second direction when rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, a situation in which game balls can be distributed to the second path by the distribution section can be provided by a simple configuration in which the distribution section is provided with a load generation section that generates an elastic force.

[Appendix B10]
The load generating section (944, etc.) generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section (94, etc.) in the first direction when the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix B9, characterized in that the gaming machine generates the game.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 has a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distributing section, so that by distributing the game balls to the first passage at once, the player can distribute the game balls to the second passage. You can get multiple timings to allocate.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B9 or B10, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided protrudingly from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, since the load generating section is provided protruding from the rotating shaft, it is possible to equalize the rotation period of the distribution section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lag between the timing at which game balls are expected to be distributed to the second passage and the timing at which game balls are actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to appendix B11, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, a so-called "goto action" in which the load generating section is manipulated by a malicious player causes the distributing section to take a position in which game balls are distributed to the second path. It can be prevented.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine according to appendix B13, wherein the leaf spring (944, etc.) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generating section (9442I, 9443I) includes a compression coil spring.

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to appendix B15, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generating section includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix B18]
The gaming machine according to appendix B17, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generating section (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to appendix B19, wherein the spiral spring (9452V, 9462V) is wound along the circumferential surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B21]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have one end fixed to the rotation shaft (941) and a first spiral spring (9452V) wound in the first direction, and one end fixed to the rotation shaft (941). The gaming machine according to appendix B20, further comprising a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

The gaming machines according to Appendix B13 to Appendix B21 have simple configurations that utilize the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The distribution section can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution section can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution section in the second direction.

[Appendix B22]
The distribution device (92) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.) when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the distribution unit (94, etc.) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.). 94) The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B11 to appendix B21, further comprising a rotation regulating means (945, etc.) for regulating rotation of the player (94) in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B22, the rotation of the distribution section is regulated by the rotation regulating means, so that it is possible to prevent the distribution section from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generating section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the load generating section can be Appropriate elastic force can be generated. Furthermore, by regulating the rotation of the distributing section by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to equalize the maximum rotation angle of the distributing section, thereby stabilizing the rotation period of the distributing section. becomes possible. This makes it easy for the player to launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to appendix B22, wherein the rotation regulating means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B23, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating section and causing the sorting section to take a posture in which game balls are sorted into the second path. .

[Appendix B24]
A load acting part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B23, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to Appendix B24 is provided with a load acting section that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section in the second direction by rotating the distribution section in the first direction. The configuration in which such a load applying section is provided can also be easily realized, and the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix B23 in which the load generating section is provided in the distribution section is achieved.

[Appendix B25]
The load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution portion (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution portion (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix B24, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B25, when the distribution part is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution part in the first direction is generated in the load acting part, so that the distribution part is rotated in the first direction. The ball is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the passage. Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix B23 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix B9.

[Appendix B26]
The gaming machine according to appendix B25, wherein the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B26, a so-called goto action is performed in which the distribution unit is placed in a position where game balls are distributed to the second path due to the load application unit being operated by a malicious player. It can be prevented.

[Appendix B27]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting section includes a leaf spring (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix B28]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting section includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix B29]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting section includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix B30]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting section includes a spiral spring (946W, 947W).

The gaming machines according to Appendixes B27 to B30 have simple configurations that utilize the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The distribution section can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution section can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution section in the second direction.

[Appendix B31]
According to any one of Appendix B24 to Appendix B30, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) further includes a load input section (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.). The game machine described.

[Appendix B32]
The load input section (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution section (94J, etc.). The gaming machine described in appendix B31.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B31 and B32, the load application section interferes with the load input section, so that the elastic force generated in the load application section is input from the load input section in order to rotate the distribution section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force that rotates the distribution section is generated in the load input section. Therefore, in the gaming machines according to Appendix B31 and Appendix B32, the impact caused by the interference between the load application section and the load generation section can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load application section and the load generation section. This makes it possible to improve the lifespan of the parts. In addition, it becomes possible to utilize the elastic force generated by elastic deformation when the load application section and the load generation section interfere with each other to rotate the distribution section. In addition, since the distribution member is in a state where game balls are distributed to the first aisle during the opening hours of the game parlor, compared to the case where the game balls are passed through the first aisle, for example, there are fewer game balls in the second aisle. If it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass, it is possible to take measures against the so-called morning situation, which is advantageous for the player when the game parlor opens.

[Appendix B33]
The gaming machine according to appendix 31 or 32, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided protrudingly from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B33, since the load input section is provided protruding from the rotating shaft, it is possible to equalize the rotation period of the distribution section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lag between the timing at which game balls are expected to be distributed to the second passage and the timing at which game balls are actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix B34]
The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B34, it is possible that a malicious player operates the load input section to cause the distribution section to take a position in which game balls are distributed to the second path, which is a so-called "goto act". It can be prevented.

[Appendix B35]
The gaming machine according to appendix B31, wherein the load input section (944T) has a cam surface (9441T, 9442T) on which the load application section (961O, 961U) slides.

[Appendix B36]
The gaming machine according to appendices B1 to B35, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B36, since the sorting section is visible from the outside, the player plays the game by checking the rotational movement of the sorting section and timing the timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passage. Can hit the ball.

[Appendix B37]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B36, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B37, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can enter the winning opening, and the gaming ball enters the winning hole. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a judgment for transition to a large number of special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix C1]
Launch control means (41) capable of launching game balls at predetermined intervals (Th);
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
Equipped with
The distribution unit (94) changes the rotation direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotation direction from the first direction to the second direction is used as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) until reaching the first switching point (P1) again via the second switching point (P2) is a positive integer multiple of the predetermined interval (Th) or approximately positive. A gaming machine characterized in that the rotation period is an integral multiple (for example, in the range of ±15% of a positive integral multiple of the rotation period).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the unit rotation period (Ts) is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval of the game balls (predetermined interval (Th)) or a value close to it, so that the game balls are distributed to the second path. It becomes easier to link the state in which the ball is easily thrown (state in which it can be distributed) and the timing of firing the game ball. Furthermore, if the timing of launching the game balls can be matched with the timing of the distribution of the game balls to the second path of the distribution device, then by performing a stop shot, the game balls can be distributed to the second path with a high probability. is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing at which it is distributed to the second passage of the distribution device, by repeating the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball, there is a high probability that the game ball will be placed in the second passage. It is also possible to allow the balls to be distributed. In addition, when multiple firing intervals of game balls by the firing control means are set, the unit rotation period is a positive integer multiple of the shortest firing interval among the multiple firing intervals, or a value close to it. .

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is within a positive integer multiple of ±15% of the predetermined interval (Th).

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C2 and Appendix C3, even if the unit rotation period (Ts) deviates from a positive integral multiple of the game ball firing interval (Th), even if the deviation is within a predetermined range. For example, the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix C1 can be achieved.

[Appendix C4]
Any of appendix C1 to appendix C3, wherein the distribution unit (94) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction. A gaming machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, when the distributing section rotates in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path, a rotational force that rotates the distributing section in the second direction is generated. . Therefore, since the sorting section is rotated in the second direction after being rotated in the first direction, it may be in a state where it is possible to sort the game balls into the second path, so the player can Since the club launches the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, it becomes possible to distribute more game balls to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of game balls to the second path is determined not by mere luck or bad luck, but by the level of skill of the player, such as whether or not he or she can hit the game ball at a timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path. Since the amount changes, the interest in the game improves.

[Appendix C5]
The distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction by the elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. rotated in the first direction by a rotational force. That is, the distribution section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the distribution section is rotated in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the first path, it becomes possible to repeatedly rotate the distribution section using this as an opportunity. As a result, by distributing game balls to the first passage once, the player can obtain multiple timings for distributing game balls to the second passage, so even players with low skill can easily distribute the game balls to the second passage. On the other hand, it becomes easier to launch the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path.

Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation of the distribution part in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after rotation in the first direction. Ru. Therefore, even after distributing game balls to the second passage, the distributing unit may be in a state of distributing game balls to the second passage, so the rotation operation of the distributing unit is triggered by distributing game balls to the second passage. In this case, by launching the game balls at an appropriate timing by stopping the ball or the like, it becomes possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path. This also increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C6]
The game machine according to appendix C4, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix C7]
The game machine according to appendix C6, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

The gaming machines according to Appendix C6 and Appendix C7 have a simple configuration because the distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction based on the simple principle of utilizing elastic force. This becomes possible.

[Appendix C8]
The distribution unit (94) includes a load generation unit (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2) that generates elastic force for rotation in the second direction when rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

The gaming machine according to appendix C8 has a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distributing section, thereby providing a situation in which the distributing section can distribute game balls to the second path.

[Appendix C9]
The load generating section (944, etc.) generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section (94, etc.) in the first direction when the distribution section (94, etc.) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix C5, characterized in that the gaming machine generates the game.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C9 has a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distributing section, so that by distributing the game balls to the first passage at once, the player can distribute the game balls to the second passage. Since the timing for distributing the game balls can be obtained a plurality of times, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game ball at the timing to have the distributing section distribute the game ball to the second path.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine according to appendix C8 or C9, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided protrudingly from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10, since the load generating section is provided protruding from the rotating shaft, it is possible to equalize the rotation period of the distribution section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lag between the timing at which game balls are expected to be distributed to the second passage and the timing at which game balls are actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein the load generating section (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C11, a so-called "goto act" is performed in which the distribution section is placed in a position in which game balls are distributed to the second path due to the load generation section being operated by a malicious player. It can be prevented.

[Appendix C12]
The distribution device (92) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.) when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the distribution unit (94, etc.) interferes with the load generation unit (944, etc.). 94) in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, since the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to prevent the distribution section from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generating section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the load generating section can be Appropriate elastic force can be generated. Furthermore, by regulating the rotation of the distributing section by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to equalize the maximum rotation angle of the distributing section, thereby stabilizing the rotation period of the distributing section. becomes possible. This makes it easy for the player to launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to appendix C12, wherein the rotation regulating means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C13, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating section to cause the sorting section to take a posture in which game balls are sorted into the second path. .

[Appendix C14]
A load acting part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C8 to C13, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to appendix C14 is provided with a load acting section that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution section in the second direction by rotating the distribution section in the first direction. The configuration in which such a load applying section is provided can also be easily realized, and the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix C8 in which the load generating section is provided in the distribution section is achieved.

[Appendix C15]
The load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution portion (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution portion (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix C14, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, when the distribution part is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution part in the first direction is generated in the load acting part, so that the distribution part is rotated in the first direction. The ball is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of game balls to the passage. Moreover, by rotating the distribution part in the first direction in response to the rotation in the second direction, the distribution part is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix C15 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix C9.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to appendix C15 or C16, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) further includes a load input section (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix C17]
The load input section (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load application section (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution section (94J, etc.). The gaming machine described in appendix C16.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C16 and C17, the load application section interferes with the load input section, so that the elastic force generated in the load application section is input from the load input section in order to rotate the distribution section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed, thereby generating an elastic force that rotates the distribution section in the load input section. Therefore, in the gaming machines according to appendices C16 and C17, the load application section and the load generation section can absorb the impact caused by the interference between the load application section and the load generation section by the elastic deformation of both the load application section and the load generation section. This makes it possible to improve the lifespan of the parts. In addition, it becomes possible to utilize the elastic force generated by elastic deformation when the load application section and the load generation section interfere with each other to rotate the distribution section.

[Appendix C14]
The gaming machine according to appendix C17, wherein the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C14, a so-called "goto action" in which the distribution section is placed in a position in which game balls are distributed to the second path due to the load application section being operated by a malicious player is possible. It can be prevented.

[Appendix C15]
The gaming machine according to appendices C1 to C14, wherein the distribution section (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the sorting section is visible from the outside, so the player plays the game by checking the rotational movement of the sorting section and timing the timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passage. Can hit the ball.

[Appendix C16]
a driving means (973X) that applies a driving force to rotate the distribution section (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) that rotates the distribution part (94) by controlling the drive means (973X) and rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction and the second direction alternately; )and,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C16, the effect of the gaming machine according to appendix C1 can be achieved when the distributing section includes a distributing device rotated by external power.

[Appendix C17]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C17, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C17, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, it becomes possible to enter the gaming ball into the winning opening, and the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening becomes possible. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining whether to move to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a transition judgment to many special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix D1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
a position indicating section (923) that indicates to the player that the distributing section (94) is in a position where it can distribute game balls to the second passageway (922);
an instruction state that controls the position instruction section (923) and indicates to the player that the distribution section (94) is in a position where it can distribute game balls to the second path (922); a position indicating unit control means (51) that controls switching between different non-indicating states;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the position indicating section is controlled by the position indicating section control means, so that the player is informed that the distributing section is in a position where the game balls can be distributed to the second passage. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the position instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing to launch the game balls that will make it easier for the game balls to be distributed to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game balls while visually confirming the rotational direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D2]
The position indicating section (923) is a light emitting section (923) that is turned on when the distributing section (94) is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second passageway (922) to enter the indicated state. 923) The gaming machine according to appendix D1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the position indicating section is brought into an indicating state and a non-instructing state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so that the position indicating section is realized by a simple configuration including the light emitting section.

[Appendix D3]
The game according to appendix D2, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting part (925) for making it easier to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting part (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, if the position indicating section has a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the position indicating section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, which solves the above concern.

[Appendix D4]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting section (94),
The position indicating unit control means (51) controls switching of the position indicating unit (923) between the indicating state and the non-indicating state based on the detection result of the position detecting unit (95). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3 characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the position instruction section is switched between an instruction state and a non-instruction state based on the detection result of the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotational position (posture) of the distribution section. state and non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution section is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D5]
a driving means (97X) that applies a driving force to rotate the distribution section (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for rotating the distribution section (94) by controlling the drive means (97X) and rotating the distribution section (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction; )and,
Furthermore,
The position instruction unit control means (51) determines whether the position instruction unit (923) is in the instruction state or the non-indication state based on the control state of the drive means (97X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the pointing state and non-instructing state of the position pointing section are switched based on the control state of the driving means by the drive control means, so that the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution section is appropriately reflected. It is possible to realize an indicated state and a non-indicated state. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution section is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D5, wherein the position instruction section (923) is provided in the distribution device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, since the position indicating section is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the timing at which game balls are likely to be sorted to the second path without taking his eyes off the sorting device. Therefore, while checking the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player moves his/her line of sight widely to see whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device is sorted into the first passage or the second passage. You can check without asking. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball launch at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix D7]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D6, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D7, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to enter the winning opening, and the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening becomes possible. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a judgment for transition to a large number of special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix E1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
a firing instruction section (923) that indicates the firing timing of game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second passageway (922);
Controls the firing instruction unit (923) to control switching between an instruction state indicating that the timing of firing is such that game balls are easily distributed to the second path (922), and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. a firing instruction unit control means (51) to
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the firing instruction section is controlled by the firing instruction section control means, so that the player can be informed that it is the timing for firing the game balls at which the distribution section can distribute the game balls to the second path. be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing of launching the game ball that will easily lead the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix E2]
The firing instruction section (923) includes a light emitting section (923) that is turned on to enter the instruction state when the game ball is fired at a timing when the game balls are likely to be sorted into the second passageway (922). The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the firing instruction section is brought into an instruction state and a non-instruction state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so the firing instruction section is realized by a simple configuration including the light emitting section.

[Appendix E3]
The game according to appendix E2, characterized in that the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting part (925) for making it easier to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting part (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, if the firing instruction section is configured to have a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, so the above concern is resolved.

[Appendix E4]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting section (94),
The firing instruction section control means (51) controls switching of the position instruction section (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result by the position detection means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the firing instruction section is switched between an instruction state and a non-instruction state based on the detection result of the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotational position (posture) of the distributing section. state and non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that it is time for the game balls to be fired at which the distribution section can distribute the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix E5]
a driving means (973X) that applies a driving force to rotate the distribution section (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) that rotates the distribution part (94) by controlling the drive means (973X) and rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction and the second direction alternately; )and,
Furthermore,
The firing instruction section control means (51) determines whether the firing instruction section (923) is in the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the control state of the drive means (973X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, the direction of rotation (posture) of the distribution section is appropriately reflected because the position instruction section is switched between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the control state of the drive means by the drive control means. It is possible to realize an instructed state and a non-indicated state. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately notify the player that it is time for the game balls to be fired at which the distribution section can distribute the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E5, wherein the firing instruction section (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, the firing instruction section is provided in the sorting device, so the player can grasp the firing timing at which the game balls are easily distributed to the second passage without taking his eyes off the sorting device. . Therefore, while checking the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player moves his/her line of sight widely to see whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device has been sorted into the first aisle or the second aisle. You can check without asking. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball launch at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix E7]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to enter the winning opening, and the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening becomes possible. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining whether to move to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a transition judgment to many special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix F1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
a direction indicating section (923, 923L, 923R) indicating the rotation direction of the distribution section (94);
an instruction state that controls the direction instruction section (923, 923L, 923R) and indicates that the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction; and the instruction state. direction indicating unit control means (51) for controlling switching between a non-indicating state and a non-indicating state different from the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the rotation direction of the distribution section is notified to the player by controlling the direction instruction section by the direction instruction section control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path, using the instruction state of the direction instruction section as a guide. This makes it easier for the player to find the timing to launch the game ball that will easily lead the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotational direction and posture of the distribution section. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch the game balls at a timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix F2]
The direction indicating section (923, 923L, 923R) is turned on when the distributing section (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction, thereby entering the indicating state. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that it has a light emitting section (923, 923L, 923R).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, the direction instruction section is brought into an instruction state and a non-instruction state by lighting and extinguishing the light emitting section, so that the direction instruction section is realized by a simple configuration including the light emitting section.

[Appendix F3]
The game according to appendix F2, characterized in that the sorting device (92) further includes a visibility assisting part (925) for making it easier to visually distinguish between a lit state and an unlit state of the light emitting part (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, if the direction indicating section has a light emitting section, there is a concern that it will be difficult to visually recognize whether the light emitting section is turned on or off due to lighting of lamps other than the direction indicating section. By providing this section, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the unlit state of the light emitting section, so the above concern is resolved.

[Appendix F4]
The direction indicating section (923L, 923R) is
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51), a first direction indicating section (923L) that is brought into the non-indicating state;
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51), a second direction indicating section (923R) that is brought into the non-indicating state;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, characterized in that the gaming machine includes the following.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, since the direction instruction section includes two direction instruction sections, the first direction instruction section and the second direction instruction section, the rotation direction of the distribution section can be determined depending on the instruction state and non-indication state of one direction instruction section. It becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution section compared to the case where the rotation direction of the distribution section is grasped. In addition, there is no need to focus on the direction indicated by the direction indicating section and the direction in the non-indicating state, for example, the lighting state of the first direction indicating section and the lighting state of the second direction indicating section. Since the rotational direction of the distribution section can be grasped by focusing only on the instruction state of the two-direction instruction section, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotational direction of the distribution section. This makes it easy to hit the game balls at the timing when the game balls are easily distributed to the second passage, so even a player with low skill can hit the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second passage. It becomes possible to improve the probability of being able to launch a .

[Appendix F5]
The sorting device (92) further includes a detection means for detecting the rotational direction of the sorting section (94),
Supplementary note F1, wherein the direction indicating unit control means (51) controls switching of the direction indicating unit (923) between the indicating state and the non-indicating state based on the detection result by the detecting unit. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note F4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the direction instruction section is switched between an instruction state and a non-instruction state based on the detection result of the detection means, so that the instruction state appropriately reflects the rotational direction (posture) of the distribution section. and a non-directed state can be realized. Therefore, based on the instruction state and non-indication state of the direction instruction section, it becomes possible to launch the game ball at a time when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high level of gameplay.

[Appendix F6]
a driving means (973X) that applies a driving force to rotate the distribution section (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) that rotates the distribution part (94) by controlling the drive means (973X) and rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction and the second direction alternately; )and,
Furthermore,
The direction instruction section control means (51) determines the instruction state and non-instruction state of the (923, 923L, 923R) based on the control state of the drive means (973X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the direction instruction section is switched between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the control state of the drive means by the drive control means, so that the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution section is appropriately reflected. It is possible to realize an indicating state and a non-instructing state of the direction indicating section. Therefore, based on the instruction state and non-indication state of the direction instruction section, it becomes possible to launch the game ball at a time when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high level of gameplay.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F6, wherein the direction instruction section (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, since the direction indicating section is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the rotating direction of the sorting section without taking his/her line of sight away from the sorting device. Therefore, while checking the rotation direction of the sorting part of the sorting device and timing the launch of the game ball, the player should check whether the game ball introduced into the sorting device is in the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether you have been sorted without having to move your line of sight. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the timing of the game ball being launched by the player and the distribution results for the game ball being launched at that timing, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix F8]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F7, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, it becomes possible for the gaming ball to enter the winning opening, and the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening becomes possible. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining whether to move to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a transition judgment to many special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix G1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
a driving means (973X) that applies a driving force to rotate the distribution section (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) that rotates the distribution part (94) by controlling the drive means (973X) and rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction and the second direction alternately; )and,
Equipped with
The drive control means (41) controls the rotation pattern of the distribution section (94) in accordance with the distribution status of game balls to the second path (922) in the distribution device (92). A gaming machine featuring:

In the game machine according to appendix G1, the rotation pattern of the distribution section is controlled by the drive control means according to the distribution status of game balls to the second path. In other words, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the distribution unit is not rotated at a fixed period, but the expected degree of distribution of game balls to the second passage is determined according to the status of distribution of game balls to the second passage. be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can adjust the difficulty level of firing the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second passage according to the skill of the player. As a result, while it is possible to reduce unfairness for players with low skill, it is also possible to increase the difficulty level for players with high skill in determining the timing of firing the game balls in order to distribute the game balls to the second passage. It is possible to provide enhanced gameplay.

[Appendix G2]
The rotation pattern is
A first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in a continuous firing game in which game balls are fired continuously at a minimum firing interval, and a first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in the continuous firing game, and a second passage (922) in the continuous firing game. ), a first rotation pattern in which the second expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to ) is equal or approximately equal;
a second rotation pattern in which the second expected value is greater than the first expected value by a predetermined value;
including;
The drive control means (41) includes:
When the absolute value of the difference in the distribution ratio between the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage is less than a specific value (for example, 0.4:0.6 to 0.6: 0.4), controlling the distribution section (94) with the first rotation pattern,
Supplementary note G1, characterized in that when the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, exceeds 0.6:0.4), the distribution section (94) is controlled in the second rotation pattern. The game machine described.

[Appendix G3]
The second rotation pattern includes changing the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the second direction to the first direction from a first switching point that switches the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the first direction to the second direction. The time required for the distribution section to rotate in the second direction to a second switching point for switching the distribution section is the time required for the distribution section to rotate in the first direction from the second switching point to the first switching point. The gaming machine according to appendix G2, characterized in that the time required for the gaming machine is longer than the time required for the gaming machine.

[Appendix G4]
The absolute value of the distribution ratio difference being equal to or less than a specific value means that the total number of game balls introduced into the distribution device in a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Among these, the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage is 0.4 to 0.6, and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage is 0.6 to 0.4,
The distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value when the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage exceeds 0.6 and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage is less than 0.4. The gaming machine according to appendix G2 or G3, characterized by:

In the gaming machines according to appendices G2 to G4, when the distribution of game balls to the first passage is excessive compared to the distribution of game balls to the second passage, the second passage is a place where game balls are more likely to be distributed to the second passage. The distribution section is rotated in a two-rotation pattern. Therefore, by rotating the distribution section in the second rotation pattern, unfairness to players with low skill can be reduced.

[Appendix G5]
The rotation pattern is
A first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in a continuous firing game in which game balls are fired continuously at a minimum firing interval, and a first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in the continuous firing game, and a second passage (922) in the continuous firing game. ), a first rotation pattern in which the second expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to ) is equal or approximately equal;
a third rotation pattern in which the second expected value is smaller than the first expected value by a predetermined value or more;
including;
The drive control means (41) includes:
When the absolute value of the difference in the distribution ratio between the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage and the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage is less than a specific value (for example, 0.4:0.6 to 0.6: 0.4), controlling the distribution section (94) with the first rotation pattern,
From appendix G1, characterized in that when the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, exceeds 0.6:0.4), the distribution section (94) is controlled in the third rotation pattern. The gaming machine described in any of Appendix G4.

[Appendix G6]
The third rotation pattern includes changing the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the first direction to the second direction from a first switching point to change the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the second direction to the first direction. The time required to rotate the distribution section in the second direction to a second switching point for switching the distribution section is the time required to rotate the distribution section in the first direction from the second switching point to the first switching point. The gaming machine according to appendix G5, characterized in that the time required for the gaming machine is shorter than that required for the gaming machine.

[Appendix G7]
The absolute value of the distribution ratio difference being equal to or less than a specific value means that the total number of game balls introduced into the distribution device in a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Among these, the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage is 0.4 to 0.6, and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage is 0.6 to 0.4,
The distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value when the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage is less than 0.4 and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage exceeds 0.6. The gaming machine according to appendix G5 or G6, characterized in that:

In the gaming machines according to appendices G5 to G7, when the distribution of game balls to the second passage is excessive compared to the distribution of game balls to the first passage, the game balls are allocated to the first passage more easily. The distribution section is rotated in a three-rotation pattern. Therefore, by rotating the sorting part in the third rotation pattern, it becomes more difficult for highly skilled players to determine the timing of firing the game balls in order to distribute the game balls to the second path. It is possible to provide enhanced gameplay.

[Appendix G8]
A prize opening (315) that provides an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passage detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball that has passed through the second passageway (922) enters the prize opening (315). ) from a first position (standby position) where entering the ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, to a second position (actuating position) where the ball passing through the second passageway (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). a movable accessory member (93) that moves in a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G7, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G8, when the passing detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can enter the winning opening, and the gaming ball enters the winning hole. A determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, when the game balls are sorted into the second passage, the player is not able to launch the game ball without paying attention to the timing when the game ball is expected to enter the winning slot, which is the trigger for determining whether to move to the special gaming state. It becomes possible. This allows the player to proceed with the game in a way that is advantageous to him/her depending on his or her skill. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to have the opportunity to receive a transition judgment to many special games with a small number of game balls launched.

[Appendix H1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about the rotation axis (941), and a second passage opposite to the first direction. It has a sorting part (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the sorting part (94, etc.). or a sorting device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction;
A prize opening (314L) into which game balls can enter,
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922);
When the passing detection means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922), the game ball passes through the first passageway (921) and the second passageway (922). The entry prize opening for game balls that have passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) from the first position (standby position) where entry of game balls into the prize opening (315) is restricted. (315), a movable accessory member (93) that moves to a second position (operating position) where ball entry is permitted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix H1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage are movable accessory members. The member allows the ball to enter the winning hole. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts and allows the game balls to enter the winning opening for the game balls passing through the first passage and the game balls passing through the second passage. Therefore, there is a movable accessory member that restricts and allows the entry of game balls passing through the first passage into the winning opening, and a movable accessory member that restricts and allows the entry of game balls passing through the second passage into the winning opening. Compared to the case where the movable accessory members are provided separately, not only can it be possible to restrict and allow the entry of game balls into the first passage and the second passage into the prize opening with a simpler configuration, but also the movable The control of accessory members also becomes easier.

[Appendix H2]
The movable accessory member (93) is triggered by the first gaming state (mode B) and the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passageway (922). The game mode further comprises a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state between a plurality of game states including a second game state (mode B) in which the operation time is longer than the first game state. The gaming machine described in appendix H1.

[Appendix H3]
Compared to the first gaming state, in the second gaming state, when the movable accessory member (93) is actuated, the game ball passing through the first passage (921) 93) The gaming machine according to appendix H2, characterized in that the game machine is easily hit by a ball.

[Appendix H4]
The plurality of gaming states further include a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E),
In the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E), is the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry prize hole (315)? further comprising determining means (41) for determining whether or not;
The gaming state transition means (41) causes the transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) when the determination result of the determining means (41) is to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state). ,
Compared to the first gaming state (mode B), the second gaming state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined by the determining means (41) to transition to the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state). The gaming machine according to appendix H2 or H3, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H2 to H4, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and when the movable accessory member is activated, the game ball is not sent to the winning hole. The ease of entering the ball, especially the ease with which the game ball passes through the first passage and enters the winning hole, differs. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the prize opening depends on whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and whether it passes through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide gaming machines with different gaming properties.

[Appendix H5]
The game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H4, wherein the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where game balls that are launched to the right side area of the game board (31) are introduced. .

[Appendix H6]
Addendum H5 further includes a guide portion (31Y) that guides all of the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92). The game machine described.

In the game machines according to Appendix H5 and Appendix H6, game balls are introduced into the distribution device by hitting the game ball into the right side area of the game board, that is, by performing so-called right-handed hitting. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a gaming feature in which a game ball is entered into a prize opening by using a sorting device in a specific gaming state among a plurality of gaming states.

[Appendix H7]
The movable accessory member (93) is
a first guide part (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passageway (921) toward the entry prize opening (315) at the second position;
a second guide part (932A, 933G) that guides a game ball passing through the second passageway (922) toward the entry prize opening (315) at the second position;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H6, characterized by having the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration and has a first guiding part and a second guiding part, so that the game ball in the first passage and the second guiding part are connected to each other. It becomes possible to guide both the game balls and the game balls in the passageway to the winning hole.

[Appendix H8]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guiding part (931A) and the second guiding part (932A), and is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the prize opening (315) at the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix H7, further comprising a through hole (933A) that allows a ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8, in addition to the first guiding part and the second guiding part, a movable accessory member with a simple structure having a through hole is used to connect the game balls in the first passage and the game balls in the second passage. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the winning hole.

[Appendix H9]
The first guide part (932G) and the second guide part (933G) are
The game balls that are close to each other in the first position and pass through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the prize opening (315) in a closed state enter the prize opening (315). limit the entry of game balls,
In the second position, the game balls are spaced apart from each other and the input prize hole (315) is opened, and the game ball passes through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) to the input prize hole (315). The game machine according to appendix H8, characterized in that it allows the entry of game balls.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game in the first passage is controlled by the movable accessory member having a simple configuration having a first guiding part and a second guiding part that can be moved close to each other. It becomes possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second passage to the winning hole.

[Appendix H10]
The game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H9, wherein the distribution section (94D to 94G) is fixed at a position where game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) interfere with each other. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, the sorting section of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency (individual differences between gaming machines) of the distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and through trial and error, find out the launch position of the game ball that makes it easier for the game ball to be distributed to the second aisle. It is fun to find the launching position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball is distributed from those game machines to the second passage. It becomes possible to enjoy searching for easy-to-understand game machines.

[Appendix H11]
The gaming machine according to appendix H10, wherein the distribution section (94F, 94G) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed section.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed part. Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to appendix H11, wherein the fixed part (942E, 941G) has one end fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix H13]
The gaming machine according to appendix H12, wherein the fixed portion (942E, 941G) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, wherein the fixing portions (942E, 941G) are nails.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H12 to H14, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part can be plastically changed, so if the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial setting value, the fixed part can be returned to the initial position. It will be possible to return it. This makes it possible to improve the imbalance in the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix H15]
The distribution part (94G) has a plurality of nails,
When viewed from the front, the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail (941G) at the top and a vertical line passing through this one nail (941G) as an axis of symmetry. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H14.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15, by adjusting the nail at the top, it is possible to improve the deviation in the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix H16]
The distribution part (94E) has a rotating body (941E) rotatably fixed by the fixing part (942E),
The rotating body (941E) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first path (921), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and moves the game ball toward the second path (922). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H14, which is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H16, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix H17]
The gaming machine according to appendix H16, wherein the rotating body (941E) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix H18]
The sorting section (94D) moves the game ball in a first direction toward the first passageway (921), and in a direction opposite to the first direction, toward the second passageway (922). The game machine according to appendix H10, which includes a roller fixed to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

In the game machines according to Appendix H17 and Appendix H18, a rotating body such as a freely rotatable roller is used as the distribution part, and this rotating body also prevents accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball with the rotating body. determined by Therefore, by randomly distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second passage depending on a chance factor, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 314: First starting port 315: Second starting port 316b: Variable winning port 319': Through gate 41: MPU
92: Sorting device 920: Inlet 921: First passage 922: Second passage 923: Synchronous lamp 924: Housing 925: Lighting mark 9251: Transparent area 9252: Mask area 93, 93A to 93F: Electric support member 93G : Electric tulip accessory device 931E: Through hole 931F: Penetrating part 932S: Left wing member 933S: Right wing member 94, 94A, 94B, 94E, 94F, 94H to 94J, 94P1, 94P2, 94Q1, 94Q2, 94R1 to 94R3, 94S1, 94S2, 94T, 94V to 94Y: Distribution member 940, 940J, 944R1, 944R2, 944S1, 944S2, 944T, 944Y: Load input section 941: Rotating shaft 942: Ball bearing guiding piece 942L: Left ball bearing guiding piece 942R : Right ball receiving guide piece 943: Eccentric part 944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944I, 944P1, 944P2, 944Q1, 944Q2, 944V, 961O: Load generation part 945W, 961J to 961O, 961P1, 961Q1, 961U: Load application part 9452V, 9462V, 9462W, 9472W: Input piece 946: Support part 947: Base 948, 949: Regulating piece 94D: Roller 94E: Windmill 941E: Rotating body 941F: Top 942E: Nail 94F: Mountain-shaped fixing part 94G: Triangular nail 941G : Apex nail 95: Detection part 9611O, 9611P1, 9611P3, 9611Q1, 9611Q3: Leaf spring 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

The game board has an introduction part, a first flow path part, a second flow path part, and a distribution part, and the game balls introduced from the introduction part from a predetermined area on the left side of the game board are handled by the distribution part. A gaming machine comprising a flow path forming means that can distribute the flow down to either the first flow path section or the second flow path section,
a first ball entry means into which game balls sorted into the first flow path part can enter;
a second ball entry means capable of receiving the game balls sorted into the second flow path section and having a function different from that of the first ball entry means;
a third ball entry means into which the game balls sorted into the second flow path part can enter, and which has a different function from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a first detection means capable of detecting game balls flowing down the second flow path section;
a second detection means that is provided in the right side area of the game board and detects that the game ball has flown down a specific area;
When a game ball is detected by the first detection means, a predetermined game ball flowing down the second flow path section is restricted from entering the second ball entry means, The predetermined game ball flowing down the second flow path is allowed to enter the second ball entering means from the first state in which the ball is allowed to enter the third ball entering means. state switching means for switching the state of the movable means to a second state in which entry of the ball into the third ball entry means is restricted;
A first gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player that the falling of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, and a first gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player that the falling of the game ball is detected by the second detection means. a second gaming state; and gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state between a plurality of gaming states including;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
The first ball entering means and the third ball entering means are configured to give different game values when a game ball enters the ball, and the third ball entering means gives a different game value. value is set to high value,
When game balls from a predetermined area on the left side of the game board are sorted by the sorting section to the first flow path section, the balls easily enter the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means and The third ball entering means is configured such that it becomes difficult for balls to enter the third ball entering means, and when game balls from a predetermined area on the left side of the game board are distributed to the second flow path section by the distribution section, the third ball entering means Based on the detection of the game balls by the detection means, the game balls sorted into the second flow path section are likely to enter the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means and the first ball entry means can easily enter the second ball entry means. 3. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entering means is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball.

Images